Renovate Engineering and Industrial Technology Building ......danville community college renovate...

Danville Community College Virginia Community College System

1008 South Main Street 300 Arboretum Place, Suite 200

Danville, Virginia Richmond, Virginia 23236

Renovate Engineering and Industrial Technology Building Expand Precision Machining Bureau of Capital Outlay Management BCOM Project Code: 260-18077-000

260-18042-002

Technical Specifications Volume 1 of 2 August 15, 2016

RRMM Architects

1317 Executive Boulevard

Suite 200

Chesapeake, Virginia 23320

http://www.google.com/url?sa=i&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=images&cd=&cad=rja&uact=8&ved=0ahUKEwiBnLy0r7fOAhVH5CYKHQTzBvkQjRwIBw&url=http://www.vccs.edu/&psig=AFQjCNF-4s-G4__9fhwsCbUh853U3AsLrQ&ust=1470936445720714

1

Renovate Existing Engineering and Industrial Technology Building

Expand Precision MachiningDanville Community College

Danville, Virginia

Technical Specifications

Volume 1 of 2

Bureau of Capital Outlay Management

State Project Codes:

260-18077-000 & 260-18042-002

August 15, 2016

ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL CIVIL

2

PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, & ELECTRICAL

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT

DANVILLE COMMUNITY COLLEGE

RENOVATE ENGINEERING AND INDUSTRIAL RRMM PROJECT NO. 13167-02

TECHNOLOGY BUILDING - EXPAND PRECISION PROJECT CODE: 260-18077-000

MACHINING PROJECT CODE: 260-18042-002

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

000115 Drawing Index

011000 Summary

014100 Special Inspections

014101 Statement of Special Inspections

018113.33 Sustainable Design Requirements - IgCC

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 Selective Demolition

024120 Selective Site Demolition

028213 Asbestos Abatement

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete

033543 Polished Concrete Finishing

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

040121 Clean and Repair of Existing Masonry

042000 Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 Structural Steel Framing

053100 Steel Decking

05500 Metal Fabrication

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 Rough Carpentry

061600 Sheathing

064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071113 Bituminous Dampproofing

072100 Thermal Insulation

072500 Weather Barriers

074213.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels

074213.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels





TABLE OF CONTENTS 2

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (CONTINUED)

074293 Soffit Panels

075113 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing

076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

077100 Roof Specialties

077200 Roof Accessories

078413 Penetration Firestopping

079200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

081213 Special Hollow Metal Frames

081416 Flush Wood Doors

083323 Overhead Coiling Doors

083613 Sectional Doors

084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

084229.13 Folding Automatic Doors

084229.23 Sliding Automatic Doors

087100 Door Hardware

088000 Glazing

088853 Security Glazing

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092900 Gypsum Board

093013 Ceramic Tiling

095123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings

095423 Linear Plank Panels and Mesh Panel Ceilings

096513 Resilient Base and Accessories

096519 Resilient Tile Flooring

096623 Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring

096813 Tile Carpeting

099113 Exterior Painting

099123 Interior Painting

099600 High-Performance Coatings





TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101100 Visual Display Units

101200 Display Cases

101419 Dimensional Letter Signage

101423 Room Identification Panel Signage

102113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments

102239 Folding Panel Partitions

102600 Wall and Door Protection

102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

104413 Fire Protection Cabinets

104416 Fire Extinguishers

105113 Solid Plastic Lockers

107400 Canopies

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

111313 Loading Dock Bumpers

115213 Projection Screens

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122413 Roller Window Shades

123553.16 Laboratory Casework

123559 Display Case Door

123616 Metal Countertops

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

This Division Not Used

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

This Division Not Used





TABLE OF CONTENTS 4

VOLUME 2

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

211000 Fire Suppression Systems

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220000 Plumbing General

220700 Plumbing Insulation

221100 Domestic Water

221123 Plumbing Pumps

221300 Drainage

221500 Compressed Air

223300 Domestic Water Heaters

223400 Solar Domestic Water Heating System with Fuel Fired Backup

224000 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230000 HVAC General Requirements

230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

230700 HVAC Insulation

230800 Mechanical Systems Commissioning

230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC

231123 Natural Gas Systems

232000 HVAC Piping and Pumps

232133 Variable Speed Drives

233000 HVAC Air Distribution

233400 HVAC Fans

238100 Decentralized Unitary HVAC Equipment

238200 Convection Heating and Cooling Units

238400 Humidification Equipment

DIVISION 24 & 25

These Divisions Not Used.

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260100 Basic Requirements for Electrical Systems

260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

260526 Grounding and Bonding

260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

260553 Identification for Electrical Systems

260573 Short-Circuit Coordination / ARC Flash Hazard Analysis

260583 Wiring Connections for Electrical Systems

260800 Electrical Systems Commissioning

260923 Lighting Control Devices

260943.13 Lighting Control Panels





TABLE OF CONTENTS 5

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (CONTINUED)

262100 Electrical Service Entrance

262413 Switchboards

262416 Panelboards

262501.01 Low-Voltage Busways

262726 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Equipment

262813 Fuses

262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

262913 Low Voltage Motor Controllers

264113.13 Lightning Protection for Buildings

264313 Surge Protection Devices

265000 Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

271013 Telecom Infrastructure

DIVISION 28 – SECURITY SYSTEMS

281300.01 Access Control

283100 Fire Detection and Alarm System

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

310500 General Sitework Requirements

311000 Site Clearing

312000 Earthwork for Buildings

312100 Site Earthwork

312200 Erosion Control

315000 Excavation Support and Protection

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 Asphalt Pavement

321313 Site Concrete

321723 Pavement Markings, Signs and Specialties

323113 Chain-Link Fences and Gates

329200 Lawns and Grasses

329300 Exterior Plants

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

332000 Exterior Water System

333000 Sanitary Sewerage

334100 Storm Drainage





TABLE OF CONTENTS 6

APPENDICES

Appendix No. 1 Hazardous Materials Inspection Report

Appendix No. 2 UL Assemblies

Appendix No. 3 EIT Building Water Leakage Report

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS





DRAWING INDEX 000115 - 1

SECTION 000115 – DRAWING INDEX

Sheet Number Sheet Title

TS1.0 ................TITLE SHEET

CIVIL

C0.0 ..................COVER

C1.0 ..................NOTES & DETAILS

C1.1 ..................NOTES & DETAILS

C2.0 ..................SITE PLAN

C2.1 ..................SITE PLAN

L1.0 ..................LANDSCAPE PLAN, NOTES AND DETAILS

L2.0 ..................LANDSCAPE PLAN, NOTES AND DETAILS

STRUCTURAL

S0.1 ..................GENERAL NOTES

S1.1 ..................LOWER FLOOR FOUNDATION PLAN

S1.2 ..................UPPER FLOOR FOUNDATION PLAN

S1.3 ..................LOWER FLOOR ROOF FRAMING PLAN

S1.4 ..................UPPER FLOOR ROOF FRAMING PLAN

S3.1 ..................SECTIONS

S3.2 ..................SECTIONS

S5.1 ..................TYPICAL DETAILS

S5.2 ..................TYPICAL DETAILS

ARCHITECTURAL

A0.1..................ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL INFORMATION

A0.2..................PARTITION TYPES AND NOTES

A0.3..................LOWER FLOOR - LIFE SAFETY PLAN

A0.4..................UPPER FLOOR - LIFE SAFETY PLAN

AD1.1...............LOWER FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLAN

AD1.2...............UPPER FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLAN

AD1.3...............DEMOLITION ROOF PLAN

AD3.1...............DEMOLITION SECTIONS

A1.0..................OVERALL FLOOR PLAN

A1.1..................LOWER FLOOR - SLAB INFILL PLAN

A1.2..................UPPER FLOOR - SLAB INFILL PLAN

A1.3..................LOWER FLOOR - NEW WORK PLAN

A1.4..................UPPER FLOOR - NEW WORK PLAN

A1.5..................LOWER FLOOR - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A1.6..................UPPER FLOOR - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A1.7..................ROOF PLAN

A2.1..................EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

A2.2..................EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

A3.1..................BUILDING SECTIONS

A3.2..................WALL SECTIONS






A3.3..................WALL SECTIONS

A4.1..................ENLARGED BOOKSTORE AND TOILET PLANS

A4.2..................ENLARGED RAMP PLANS AND DETAILS

A4.3..................ENLARGED ENTRANCE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS

A5.1..................DETAILS

A5.2..................PLAN DETAILS

A5.3..................ROOF DETAILS

A6.1..................DOOR SCHEDULE

A6.2..................STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS

A6.3..................DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS

A6.4..................DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS

A7.1..................INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE, LEGEND AND NOTES

A7.2..................FLOOR PATTERN PLAN - OVERALL

A7.3..................FLOOR PATTER PLAN - LOWER LEVEL

A7.4..................FLOOR PATTERN PLAN - UPPER LEVEL

A7.5..................LOWER FLOOR SIGNAGE PLAN

A7.6..................UPPER FLOOR SIGNAGE PLAN

A8.1..................CASEWORK ELEVATIONS

A8.2..................CASEWORK SECTIONS

A8.3..................INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

FIRE PROTECTION

SP0.1 ................SPRINKLER LEGEND, NOTES AND DETAILS

SP1.1 ................LOWER FLOOR PLAN - SPRINKLER

SP1.2 ................UPPER FLOOR PLAN - SPRINKLER

PLUMBING

P0.1 ..................PLUMBING LEGEND, NOTES AND DETAILS

PD1.1................LOWER FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLAN - PLUMBING

PD1.2................UPPER FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLAN - PLUMBING

P1.1 ..................LOWER FLOOR - NEW WORK PLAN - DOMESTIC WATER

P1.2 ..................UPPER FLOOR - NEW WORK PLAN - DOMESTIC WATER

P1.3 ..................LOWER FLOOR - NEW WORK PLAN - SANITARY

P1.4 ..................UPPER FLOOR - NEW WORK PLAN - SANITARY

P1.5 ..................LOWER ROOF PLAN - PLUMBING

P1.6 ..................UPPER ROOF PLAN - PLUMBING

P2.1 ..................ENLARGED PLANS - PLUMBING

MECHANICAL

M0.1 .................HVAC LEGEND, EQUIPMENT NOTES AND DETAILS

M0.2 .................SCHEMATICS - HVAC

MD1.1 ..............LOWER FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLAN - HVAC

MD1.2 ..............UPPER FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLAN - HVAC

M1.1 .................LOWER FLOOR PLAN - HVAC

M1.2 .................UPPER FLOOR PLAN - HVAC

M1.3 .................LOWER ROOF PLAN - HVAC

M1.4 .................UPPER ROOF PLAN - HVAC






ELECTRICAL

E0.1 ..................ELECTRICAL LEGEND, NOTES, SCHEDULE AND DETAILS

ED1.1 ...............LOWER FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

ED1.2 ...............UPPER FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

E1.1 ..................LOWER FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING

E1.2 ..................UPPER FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING

E2.1 ..................LOWER FLOOR PLAN - POWER

E2.2 ..................UPPER FLOOR PLAN - POWER

E2.3 ..................ROOF PLAN - POWER

E3.1 ..................LOWER FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM & COMMUNICATIONS

E3.2 ..................UPPER FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM & COMMUNICATIONS

E4.1 ..................POWER RISER DIAGRAMS AND DETAILS

E5.1 ..................PANELBOARD SCHEDULES




END OF DRAWING INDEX






THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK





SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Owner-furnished products.

4. Access to site.

5. Work restrictions.

6. Specification and Drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Danville Community College – Renovate Engineering and Industrial

Technology Building – Expand Precision Machining, BCOM Project No. 260-18077-000

and 260-18042-002.

1. Project Location: Danville Community College, 1008 Main Street, Danville,

Virginia, 24541.

B. Owner: Virginia Community College System (VCCS), 300 Arboretum Place, Suite 200,

Richmond, Virginia 23236.

1. Owner's Representative: Bill Price, VCCS Capital Outlay Program Manager,

Virginia Community College System.

C. Architect: RRMM Architects, 1317 Executive Boulevard, Suite 200, Chesapeake, Virginia,

23320.





SUMMARY 011000 - 2

D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals who have

prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical Engineers: Lawrence Perry and Associates.

2. Structural Engineer: Stroud, Pence, and Associates.

3. Civil Engineer: Timmons Group.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The complete renovation of the existing Charles R. Hawkins Engineering and

Industrial Technology Building of approximately 47,290 square feet, Business (B)

occupancy. Existing hazardous materials, select structural and non-structural walls,

the majority of plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems, ceilings, windows,

roofing will be demolished. Also included in the work is the covering of the existing

precast fascia with aluminum composite panels, the complete replacement of

windows, roof and plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems, a new interior

ramp, stairs and new walls and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,

storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Existing and New Equipment: Refer to Drawing Sheet A1.3 for full equipment list.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this

Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of

Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40

feet beyond building perimeter; 15 feet beyond surface walkways, patios, surface

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=113





SUMMARY 011000 - 3

parking, and utilities; and 25 feet beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces

that require additional staging areas to limit compaction in the constructed areas.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances

serving the campus clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by

construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by

construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair

damage caused by construction operations.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours

of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: Coordinate with Owner.

2. Early Morning Hours: Coordinate with Owner.

3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances is not

permitted.

F. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug screening of Contractor

personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.






SUMMARY 011000 - 4

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language

and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular

situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are

implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically

stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the

Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings

to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used

in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as

part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000





QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014100 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Special Inspection

Services.

B. Certain structural components of the Project will be subject to the requirements for Special

Inspections. Special Inspections will be applicable to the following specification sections:

1. Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete for Buildings.

2. Section 042000 Unit Masonry.

3. Section 051200 Structural Steel Framing.

4. Section 051213 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing.

5. Section 052100 Steel Joist Framing.

6. Section 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing.

7. Section 312000 Building Earthwork.

C. The Owner will procure and bear all costs of the Project Inspector and the Independent

Testing Laboratory, except as otherwise noted. The Project Inspector will be the manager

of the Special Inspection process. The Project Inspector checks the certification of all other

inspecting agents required by Special Inspections and coordinates their activities. The

Project Inspector carries the responsibility for coordinating Special Inspections. The

Statement of Special Inspections will be required by the Building Official as a condition for

building permit issuance.

D. Requirements for Special Inspections are outlined in the Statement and Schedule of Special

Inspections included in the General Conditions and Forms elsewhere in this Project Manual.

1. Specific quality-assurance and control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in

those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other

quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract

Document requirements.






3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services

required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by

provisions of this Section.

E. Special Inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified

or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with

the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in

those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other

quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract


3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services

required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by

provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

F. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" specifies requirements for inspection and

testing requirements.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor shall provide and include in the Contract Sum, in-

spections, tests, and other similar quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Con-

tract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction except where they are spe-

cifically indicated to be the Owner’s responsibility, or are provided by another identified

entity.

1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections,

tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompli-

ance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test

was Contractor's responsibility.

a. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies in work that inspections and

laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with

requirements.

b. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the

Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original

construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.

2. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for

compliance with the Contract Document requirements.






a. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other

quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

3. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing

required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary

services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to

permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not

limited to, the following:

a. Provide access to the Work.

b. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and

tests.

c. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require

testing or assist the agency in taking samples.

d. Provide and maintain for the sole use of the Special Inspector or Special

Inspectors adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of test samples

on the Project Site.

e. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for

materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.

f. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project

Site.

g. The Contractor shall designate a representative (the superintendent or an

assistant to the superintendent) who shall be the direct point-of-contact with

the Special Inspector during each phase of the work. Discrepancies noted

during the progress of the work will be reported to the Contractor’s

representative for corrective action. Communications given by the Special

Inspector to the Contractor’s representative shall be as binding as if given to

the Contractor.

B. Special Inspector Responsibilities:

1. The responsibilities of the Inspector shall be as specified in the Commonwealth of

Virginia Construction and Professional Services Manual (CPSM) and as specified in

this section. In the event of conflict, the CPSM shall govern.

2. The Special Inspector shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether

test specimens comply with requirements, specifically state any deviations therefrom,

and record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

3. The Special Inspector will keep records of all inspection and tests which will be fur-

nished to the Building Official, the Architect, and the Structural Engineer of Record.

4. The Special Inspector shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregular-

ities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. All

discrepancies will be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correc-

tion. If discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies will be brought to the atten-

tion of the Building Official and the Structural Engineer of Record.






5. The Special Inspector shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

6. The Special Inspector shall not release, revoke, alter, decrease or increase the Contract


C. Independent Testing Laboratory Responsibilities: The Independent Testing Laboratory en-

gaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified

in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance

of the Laboratory’s duties. The Laboratory shall provide qualified personnel to perform re-

quired inspections and tests.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in

the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ

tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested

and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Shall not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or

approve or accept any portion of the Work.

D. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspection, tests and

similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required ser-

vices with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordi-

nate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommo-

date inspections and tests.

1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking

samples, and similar activities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 48 hours of each inspection or test, the Special Inspector and each Independent

Testing Laboratory shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar

service to the Architect and the Structural Engineer of Record.

1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,

when the authority so directs.

2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but

are not limited to, the following:

a. Date of issue.

b. Project title and number.

c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.

f. Designation of the Work and test method.






g. Identification of product and Specification Section.

h. Complete inspection or test data.

i. Test results and an interpretation of test results.

j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.

k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work

complies with Contract Document requirements.

l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

m. Recommendations on retesting.

B. The Special Inspector shall submit a Final Report to the Architect and the Structural

Engineer of Record documenting completion of all required special inspections and

corrections of any discrepancies noted, which shall then be submitted to the Building

Official prior to, and as a condition of, issuance of the Certificate of Use and Occupancy.

1. Each Independent Testing Laboratory shall submit a final report of all required

special inspections and corrections of any discrepancies noted shall be submitted to

the Special Inspector for inclusion in the Final Report.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualification for Special Inspector: The Special Inspector shall be a Registered Profession-

al Engineer, Licensed in the State of Virginia, experienced in performing special inspec-

tions and shall be approved by the Building Official and the Architect. The credentials of

all Inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided if requested.

B. Qualifications for Independent Testing Laboratory: Engage independent inspection and

testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Inde-

pendent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifica-

tion" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.

1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be au-

thorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is

located.

2. Each independent Inspection and Testing Agency engaged on the Project shall

demonstrate that it has the experience and capability to conduct the required field and

laboratory testing without delaying the progress of the work. The minimum require-

ments shall be as follows:

a. Reinforced Concrete testing

1) ACI-CFTT Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1

2) ACI-LTT Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade 1 or 2 and Strength

Testing Technician

3) NICET-CT – Concrete Technician – Level II

b. Reinforced Concrete Inspection






1) ACI-CCI Concrete Construction Inspector

2) ICC-RCSI Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector

c. Structural Steel

1) AWS-CWI Certified Welding Inspector

2) AWS/AISC-CSI Certified Steel Inspector

3) ICC-SWSI Structural Steel and Welding Inspector

d. Structural Masonry

1) ICC-SMSI Structural Masonry Special Inspector

e. Soils Testing

1) NICET-ST- Soils Technician Level II

2) NICET-GET – Geotechnical Engineering Technician Level III

B. Pre-Construction Conference – Prior to the start of project construction, the Special

Inspector shall conduct a Pre-Construction Conference to discuss the requirements for

Special Inspections as well as the Administrative Procedures to be followed during the

course of the project. Protocols for notification, documentation, and individual

responsibilities shall be reviewed. Attendees shall include, but are not limited to:

1. Owner

2. Owner’s Project Manager

3. Owner’s Project Inspector

4. Owner’s Independent Testing Agency

5. Architect

6. Structural Engineer

7. Contractor’s Project Manager

8. Contractor’s Superintendent

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched

areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as






invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting

and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.







Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility

Each contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a system or component designated in the Quality Assurance Plan must submit a Statement of Responsibility. Project: Contractor’s Name: Address: License No.: Description of designated building systems and components included in the Statement of Responsibility:

Contractor’s Acknowledgment of Special Requirements I hereby acknowledge that I have received, read, and understand the Quality Assurance Plan and Special Inspection program. I hereby acknowledge that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the construc-tion documents approved by the Building Official. ________________________________ _______________ Signature Date

Contractor’s Provisions for Quality Control Procedures for exercising control within the contractor’s organization, the method and fre-quency of reporting and the distribution of reports is attached to this Statement. Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) in the organization are attached to this Statement.






CASE Form 103 Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility CASE 2004






Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance

Each approved fabricator that is exempt from Special Inspection of shop fabrication and im-plementation procedures per section 1704.2 of the International Building Code must submit a Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance at the completion of fabrication. Project: Fabricator’s Name: Address: Certification or Approval Agency: Certification Number: Date of Last Audit or Approval: Description of structural members and assemblies that have been fabricated: I hereby certify that items described above were fabricated in strict accordance with the ap-proved construction documents. ________________________________ _______________ Signature Date ________________________________ Title

Attach copies of fabricator’s certification or building code evaluation service report and fabri-cator’s quality control manual

CASE Form 104 Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance CASE 2004

Froehling and Robertson, Inc

1734 Siebel Drive, N.E.

Roanoke, Virginia 24012

(540) 344-7939

John Ranson

(434) 770-4892

William E. Price

(804) 835-4652

Virginia Community College System

William E. Price

(804) 835-4652

260-18077-000 & 260-18077-000

Renovate Engineering and Technology Building - Expand Precision Machining

260-

1807

7-00

0 &

260

-180

77-0

00R

enov

ate

Eng

inee

ring

and

Tec

hnol

ogy

Bui

ldin

g -

Exp

and

Pre

cisi

on M

achi

ning





SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - IGCC 018113.33 - 1

SECTION 018113.33 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - IgCC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain

International Green Construction Code (IgCC) requirements.

1. Other IgCC requirements depend on product selections and may not be specifically

identified as IgCC requirements. Compliance with IgCC requirements will be used as

one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.

2. Specific IgCC requirements are also included in other Sections.

3. A copy of the IgCC Compliance matrix is attached at the end of this section for

information only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IgCC: International Green Construction Code.

1. Definitions that are a part of the IgCC apply to this Section.

B. Recycled Content Building Materials: Materials that contain not less than 50 percent

combined recycled content (postconsumer and preconsumer) or contain not less than 25

percent combined recycled content and that comply with requirements for recyclable

building materials and building components.

C. Recyclable Building Materials and Building Components: Materials and components that

can be recycled into the same or another material with a recovery rate of not less than 30

percent or that are recyclable through an established, nationally available, closed-loop

manufacturer's take-back program.

D. Bio-Based Materials: One of the following:

1. Materials with bio-based content of not less than 75 percent when tested according to

ASTM D 6866.

2. Wood and wood products that are labeled in accordance with the American Forest &

Paper Association's Sustainable Forestry Initiative.






3. Wood and wood products that are certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-

001 and FSC STD-40-004.

4. Wood and wood products that are certified and labeled in accordance with the

standards of the Programme for Endorsement of Forest Certification.

5. Salvaged or reused wood products.

6. Materials that comply with 7 CFR 3202.

E. Indigenous Materials: Materials and products that are manufactured within 500 miles of

Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If materials are transported by rail or water,

the distance transported by rail or water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to determine the

distance to the Project site. If only a portion of a material or product complies with this

requirement, only that portion shall be considered indigenous.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect and BCOM regarding IgCC requirements

that are the responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product

qualities, or that depend on Contractor's procedures. Document responses as informational

submittals.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit additional sustainable design submittals required by other Specification

Sections.

B. Sustainable design submittals are in addition to other submittals.

1. If submitted item is identical to that submitted to comply with other requirements,

include an additional copy with other submittal as a record copy of compliance with

indicated IgCC requirements instead of separate sustainable design submittal. Mark

additional copy "Sustainable design submittal."

C. IgCC Documentation Submittals:

1. Material Selection: Product data for used, recycled, recyclable, bio-based, and

indigenous materials showing compliance with requirements. Tabulate mass, volume,

or cost for building materials used in the Project and indicate those that are used,

recycled, recyclable, bio-based, or indigenous. Include summary of building

materials tabulation, showing compliance with requirement and the following:

a. Receipts for used materials, indicating sources and mass, volume, or cost as

applicable.

b. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers for recyclable

materials. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.






c. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers indicating

percentage by weight of recycled content for products having recycled content.

Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

d. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers for bio-based

materials. Include chain-of-custody certificates for products containing

certified wood. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as

applicable.

e. Product data for indigenous materials indicating location of material

manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for raw materials.

Include statement indicating distances from Project site, modes of

transportation, and mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

2. Construction Waste Management: Comply with Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

3. Indoor-Air Quality (IAQ) During Construction:

a. Construction IAQ management plan.

b. Product data for temporary filtration media.

c. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.

4. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control: Product data for the following, indicating

compliance with requirements.

a. Composite wood products.

b. Adhesives and sealants.

c. Paints and coatings.

d. Flooring.

e. Acoustical ceilings and wall systems.

f. Insulation.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Action Plans: Submit the following action plans within 14 days of date established for

commencement of the Work, indicating how requirements will be met.

1. Material Selection Plan: List of proposed materials. Tabulate anticipated mass,

volume, or cost for proposed building materials and indicate those that are used,

recycled, recyclable, bio-based, or indigenous. Include summary of proposed

building materials tabulation, showing compliance with requirement. Plan should

demonstrate that not less than 55 percent of the total building materials used in this

project, based on mass, volume or cost, shall comply with one or any combination of

the material properties outlined in IgCC 503.2.

2. Waste management plan complying with Section 017419 "Construction Waste


3. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control Plan: List of proposed products. Indicate

each product that complies with criteria, each product that does not, and anticipated






quantities of each that will be used. Include calculations showing that percentage of

noncompliant products will not exceed allowable limit.

4. Construction IAQ management plan.

5. Submit a spreadsheet identifying materials scheduled, applicable section of IgCC 806

which applies, VOC limits allowed by IgCC 806 and VOC content of the product

selected.

B. Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing

actual construction activities with action plans. Design action plans for the following:

1. Waste Reduction complying with Section 017419 Construction Waste Management

and disposal.

2. Recycled content.

3. Indigenous Material.

4. Certified wood products.

5. Material emissions and pollutant control.

C. IAQ test report.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Provide products and procedures necessary to comply with requirements in this Section for

material selection and for material emissions and pollutant control. Although other Sections

may specify some requirements for material selection and for material emissions and

pollutant control, the Contractor shall provide additional materials and procedures necessary

to comply with requirements.

2.2 MATERIAL SELECTION

A. Provide not less than 55 percent of construction materials that comply with one of the

following, excluding electrical, mechanical, plumbing, security, fire detection, fire alarm,

controls, fire suppression, and elevators.

1. Used materials and components.

2. Recycled content building materials.

3. Recyclable building materials and building components.

4. Bio-based materials.

5. Indigenous materials.






2.3 MATERIAL EMISSIONS AND POLLUTANT CONTROL

A. Composite wood products shall have formaldehyde emission rates not greater than the

following when tested according to ASTM D 6007 or ASTM E 1333.

1. Hardwood Plywood: 0.05 ppm.

2. Particleboard: 0.09 ppm.

3. Medium-Density Fiberboard More Than 5/16 Inch Thick: 0.11 ppm.

4. Medium-Density Fiberboard 5/16 Inch or Less in Thickness: 0.13 ppm.

B. Adhesives and Sealants: Not less than 85 percent of field-applied adhesives and sealants

that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of first two

subparagraphs below:

1. VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of

Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic

Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb,

whichever is less.

2. VOC content shall not exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the

following:

a. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.

b. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.

c. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.

d. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.

e. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.

f. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.

g. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.

h. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.

i. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.

j. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.

k. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.

l. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

m. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

n. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

o. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.

p. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.

q. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.

r. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.

s. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.

t. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.

u. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.

v. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.

w. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesives (Contact Adhesives That Are Used to

Bond Melamine-Covered Board, Metal, Unsupported Vinyl, Rubber, or Wood

Veneer 1/16 Inch or Less in Thickness to Any Surface): 250 g/L.






C. Paints and Coatings: Not less than 85 percent of field-applied paints and coatings that are

inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the following:

1. VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of



Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb,

whichever is less.


following:

a. Flat Coatings: 50 g/L.

b. Nonflat Coatings: 100 g/L.

c. Nonflat - High Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L.

d. Bond Breakers: 350 g/L.

e. Concrete Curing Compounds: 350 g/L.

f. Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100 g/L.

g. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.

h. Faux Finishing Coatings: 350 g/L.

i. Fire-Resistive Coatings: 350 g/L.

j. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

k. Form-Release Compounds: 250 g/L.

l. Graphic Arts Coatings (Sign Paints): 500 g/L.

m. High-Temperature Coatings: 420 g/L.

n. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L.

o. Low Solids Coatings: 120 g/L.

p. Magnesite Cement Coatings: 450 g/L.

q. Mastic Texture Coatings: 100 g/L.

r. Metallic Pigmented Coatings: 500 g/L.

s. Multi-Color Coatings: 250 g/L.

t. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

u. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.

v. Reactive Penetrating Sealers: 350 g/L.

w. Recycled Coatings: 250 g/L.

x. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 250 g/L.

y. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.

z. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

aa. Stains: 250 g/L.

bb. Swimming Pool Coatings: 340 g/L.

cc. Tub and Tile Refinish Coatings: 420 g/L.

dd. Waterproof Membranes: 250 g/L.

ee. Wood Coatings: 275 g/L.

ff. Wood Preservatives: 350 g/L.

gg. Zinc-Rich Primers: 340 g/L.

D. Flooring: Not less than 85 percent of flooring materials shall comply with the requirements

of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and

Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using






Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu.

m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less. Where post manufactured coatings or applications have

not been applied, concrete; ceramic and concrete tile; clay and concrete pavers; metal; and

organic-free, mineral-based flooring shall be deemed to comply with this requirement.

E. Acoustical Ceilings: Not less than 85 percent of acoustic ceilings shall comply with the

requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the

Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using


m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.

F. Wall Systems: Not less than 85 percent of wall systems shall comply with the requirements




m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less. Where post manufactured coatings or applications have

not been applied, concrete, concrete masonry, clay masonry, gypsum plaster, ceramic and

concrete tile, metal, and organic-free, mineral-based materials shall be deemed to comply

with this requirement.

G. Insulation: 85 percent of insulation shall comply with the requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile

Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is

less, except for insulation manufactured without formaldehyde.

H. Total VOC Limit: Not less than 50 percent of adhesives, sealants, paints, coatings, flooring,

acoustical ceilings, wall systems, and insulation shall have a total VOC emission rate of not

more than 500 micrograms/cu. m when determined according to the California Department

of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NONSMOKING BUILDING

A. Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable

windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Comply with Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."






3.3 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

A. Cover or close openings in ducts and other related air-distribution component openings with

tape, plastic, sheet metal, or other approved method before beginning dust-producing

operations and maintain until dust-producing operations are complete.

B. Provide temporary ventilation during construction, using one or more of the following

methods:

1. Natural ventilation complying with the IBC.

2. Fans that produce three air changes per hour.

3. Exhaust in work areas at not less than 0.05 cfm/sq. ft. and not less than 10 percent

greater than supply air to maintain a negative pressure.

C. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during

construction period, as specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls,"

install MERV 8 filter media according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-

handling system used during construction.

1. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.

D. Air-Quality Testing: Engage testing agency to perform the following:

1. Conduct baseline IAQ testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using

testing protocols in accordance with ASTM D 5197, ASTM D 5466, ASTM D 6196,

ASTM D 6345, and ISO 7708. The number of sampling points shall not be less than

one per 25,000 sq. ft. or for each contiguous floor area.

2. Concentrations of the following shall not exceed:

a. Particulates (PM2.5): 35 micrograms/cu. m. (24 h)

b. Particulates (PM10): 150 micrograms/cu. m. (24 h)

c. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor levels.

d. 1, 1, 1-Trichloroethane: 1000 micrograms/cu. m.

e. 1, 3-Butadiene: 20 micrograms/cu. m.

f. 1, 4-Dichlorobenzene: 800 micrograms/cu. m.

g. 1, 4-Dioxane: 3000 micrograms/cu. m.

h. 2-Propanol: 7000 micrograms/cu. m.

i. Acetaldhyde: 140 micrograms/cu. m.

j. Acrylonitrile: 5 micrograms/cu. m.

k. Benzene: 60 micrograms/cu. m.

l. t-Butyl Methyl Ether: 8000 micrograms/cu. m.

m. Carbon Disulfide: 800 micrograms/cu. m.

n. Carbon Tetrachloride: 40 micrograms/cu. m.

o. Chlorobenzene: 1000 micrograms/cu. m.

p. Chloroform: 300 micrograms/cu. m.

q. Dichloromethene: 400 micrograms/cu. m.

r. Ethybenzene: 2000 micrograms/cu. m.

s. Ethylene Glycol: 400 micrograms/cu. m.






t. Formaldehyde: 27 micrograms/cu. m.

u. n-Hexane: 7000 micrograms/cu. m.

v. Naphthalene: 9 micrograms/cu. m.

w. Phenol: 200 micrograms/cu. m.

x. Styrene: 900 micrograms/cu. m.

y. Tetrachloroethane: 35 micrograms/cu. m.

z. Toluene: 300 micrograms/cu. m.

aa. Trichloroethane: 600 micrograms/cu. m.

bb. Xylene Isomers: 700 micrograms/cu. m.

cc. Total Volatile Organic Compounds: 500 micrograms/cu. m.

3. Where carpets and fabrics with styrene butadiene rubber latex backing are installed,

concentrations of the following shall not exceed:

a. 1-Methyl-2-Pyrrolidinone: 160 micrograms/cu. m.

b. 2-Ethylhexanoic Acid: 25 micrograms/cu. m.

c. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 2.5 micrograms/cu. m.

d. Caprolactam: 100 micrograms/cu. m.

e. Nonanal: 13 micrograms/cu. m.

f. Octanal: 7.2 micrograms/cu. m.

4. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded,

conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the specific parameter(s)

exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all

requirements have been met. When retesting noncomplying building areas, take

samples from same locations as in the first test.

5. If any maximum concentration limit is exceeded and not mitigated and successfully

retested, the building shall be flushed out for 14 days with air-handling units at

maximum outside air while maintaining a temperature of at least 60 deg F and a

relative humidity of not more than 60 percent.

END OF SECTION 018113.33








lodea

Text Box

RENOVATE ENGINEERING INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY BUILDINGDanville Community College

Virginia Energy Conservation and Environmental Performance StandardsIgCC v.1.0 2010 Section Compliance8/15/2016

Atta

chm

ent (

Y or

N/A

)

Requ

ired

by V

EES C

ompl

ianc

e M

atrix

(Y/N

)

Appl

icab

le to

Pro

ject

(Y/N

)

To B

e Ac

hiev

ed o

n Pr

ojec

t (Y/

N)

Remarks / Justification Desig

n/Co

nstr

uctio

n (D

/C)

Resp

onsi

ble

Part

y (O

, GC,

C, A

, S, P

, M, E

)

Chapter 4- Site Development and Land Use402.1 General- Preservation of Natural Resources Y Existing site and building to remain.402.2 Protection by Area Y Existing site and building to remain.402.3 Site Design and Development Y N N Existing irrigation system and landscaping to remain.402.3.6 Building Site and Waste Management Plan Y Y Y C GC

403.1 Walkways and Bicycle Paths Y N NExisting walkways to entrances and bicycle paths to remain.Where new entrances are created, new paths are being created.

403.2 Changing and Shower Facilities Y Y N There are other shower facilities on campus403.3 Bicycle Parking and Storage Y Y Y Bicycle rack is included in this project D C403.4 Vehicle Parking N N N Out of scope of this project404.1 General - Heat Island Mitigation Y Y Y D C404.2 Site Hardscape Y Y Y D C404.3 Roof Coverings Y Y Y D A405.1 Light Pollution Control Y Y Y D E405.2 Uplight Y Y Y D E405.3 Light Trespass and Glare Y Y Y D E406.1 General - Detailed Site Development Requirements Y N N Existing irrigation system and landscaping.406.2 Subsurface Graywater Irrigation Systems Y N N Existing irrigation system and landscaping.406.3 Vegetation and Soil Protection Y N N Existing irrigation system and landscaping.406.4 Soil Reuse and Restoration Y N N Existing irrigation system and landscaping.406.5 Landscape, Soil and Water Quality Protection Plan N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix406.6 Vegetative Roofs Y N N No vegetative roof in project.407.1 General - Project Electives N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix407.2 Preservation of Natural Resources N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix407.3 Transportation Impact N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix407.4 Heat Island N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix407.5 Light Pollution Reduction N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

Chapter 5 502.1 Construction Material Waste Management Plan Y Y Y C GC502.2 Post Construction Waste Recycling Y Y Y DCC has a recycling program. O502.3 Storage of Lamps, Batteries and Electronics N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix503.1 Material Selection and Properties Y Y Y D/C GC/A503.2 Material Selection Y Y Y D/C GC/A503.3 Environmental Stewardship N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix504.1 Low Mercury Lamps Y Y Y D E504.2 Straight Fluorescent Lamps Y Y Y D E504.3 Compact Fluorescent Lamps Y N N D E505.1 Building Service Life Plan N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix506.1 Storage and Handling of Materials Y Y Y C GC506.2 Construction Phase Moisture Control Y Y Y C GC507.1 General - Project Electives N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix507.2 Waste Management N Y Y May want to considered even if not required. C GC507.3 Material Selection N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix507.4 Multi-Story Building N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix507.5 Reduced Building Volume N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix507.6 Service Life N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix507.7 Moisture Control N N N

Chapter 6 602.1 Total Annual Net Energy Use (TANEU) Y Y Y Mechanical system will have TANEU < 70 per table 602.1 M



Atta

chm

ent (

Y or

N/A

)

Requ

ired

by V

EES C

ompl

ianc

e M

atrix

(Y/N

)

Appl

icab

le to

Pro

ject

(Y/N

)

To B

e Ac

hiev

ed o

n Pr

ojec

t (Y/

N)


n/Co

nstr

uctio

n (D

/C)

Resp

onsi

ble

Part

y (O

, GC,

C, A

, S, P

, M, E

)

602.2 International Energy Conservation Code

Y Y Y

502.4 - Air Leakage through envelop to be address by Architect,OA intake and EA opening shall include non-motorized backdraftdampers. 503.2 - Provision to all mechanical systems; Heatingand Cooling loads have been determined by procedures describedin ASHRAE std 183,CEquipment will be sized for the calculatedload and not oversized, Mechanical equipment will meet all theefficiency requirements, Thermostatic controls shall be providedfor each zone, Setbacks and controls shall be provided by 503.2,Ventilation will be provided in accordance with IMC ch 4,Demand control ventilation shall be provided for large spaces,Energy recovery will be provided in the ERV, Ductwork and Pipingshall be constructed per section 503.2, Fan horsepower shall notexceed the limitation of table 503.2.10.1(2). M

602.3 Compliance PathsY Y Y

The project shall comply with 602.3.2 - Performance-basedcompliance; deliver a TANUE not greater than 70, reduce CO2emissions in accordance with 603.1.3 M

602.4 Documentation and verification for Existing Buildings Y Y Y Chapter 10 requirement eliminated by owner M603.1 Determination of Building Annual Energy Use, Peak Energy Demand, and

Reduced CO2e EmissionsY Y Y Provided in the energy model M

603.2 Documentation Procedures Y Y YEnergy model documentation are in accordance with IECC section506.4 M

603.3 Calculation Procedures Y Y YEnergy model calculation are in accordance with IECC section506.5 M

603.4 Qualified Software Determinations of Annual Energy Use Y Y Y Calculation software in is accordance with IECC M603.5 Design Professional in Responsible Charge of Building Energy

SimulationY Y Y Kevin Allen is the registered design Professional for the project M

604.1 Purpose N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix604.2 Intent N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix604.3 Energy Distribution Design Requirements and Load Type Isolation N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix604.4 Energy Type Metering N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix604.5 Energy Load Type Submetering N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix604.6 Minimum Energy Measurement and Verification N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix604.7 Energy Display N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

605.1 Establishing an Open and Interprobable Automated Demand Response(Auto-DR) Infrastructure

N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

605.2 Software Clients Y N N Auto-DR infrastructure is not required per 605.1 605.3 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems Y N N Auto-DR infrastructure is not required per 605.1 605.4 Lighting Y Y Y E605.5 Building Component Specific Strategies Y N N Not Applicable for this project.606.1 Prescriptive Compliance - Building Envelope Systems Y N N Mechanical systems shall meet the performance requirements 607.1 Prescriptive Compliance - Building Mechanical Systems Y Y Y Mechanical systems shall meet the performance requirements M

607.2 HVAC Equipment Performance Requirements Y Y YMechanical equipment and fans shall meet the requiredefficiencies of section 607.2 M

607.3 Ventilation Y Y Y Ventilation will be provided in accordance with IMC ch 4. M

607.4 Duct and Plenum Insulation, Sealing and Testing Y Y YDuct construction and testing shall be in accordance wit IECC andSMACNA M

607.5 HVAC Piping Insulation Y Y Y Pipe insulation shall be in accordance with section 607.5 M607.6 Economizers Y Y Y Air size economizers will be provided. M607.7 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Fan Control Y Y Y Fans with motors > 1hp shall included VFD or ECM motors M607.8 Kitchen Exhaust Systems Y Y N The project does not include a kitchen 607.9 Laboratory Exhaust Systems Y Y N The project does not include a Lab 607.10 Control of HVAC in Hotel/Motel Guest Rooms Y N N The project is not a hotel or motel.608.1 Prescriptive Compliance - Building Service Water Heating Systems Y Y Y Mechanical systems shall meet the performance requirements M608.2 Service Water Heating (SWH) Equipment Performance Requirements Y Y Y Equipment shall comply with section 608.2.1 adnd 2 M608.3 Pools, Hot Tubs and Spas N N N Not Applicable for this project.608.4 Snowmelt Systems N N N Not Applicable for this project.608.5 Rough-Ins for Future Solar Hot Water Pre-Heat N N N Not Applicable for this project.608.6 Waste Water Energy Recovery System N N N Not Applicable for this project.608.7 Service Water Heating Piping Insulation Y Y Y Service Hot shall comply with section 608.2.1 and 2 M608.8 Circulating Hot Water Systems Y Y Y P609.1 General - Building Electrical Power and Lighting Systems Y Y Y Mechanical systems shall meet the performance requirements M609.2 Sleeping Unit Controls Y N N Not Applicable for this project.609.3 Interior Light Reduction Controls N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix609.4 Exterior Lighting Controls Y Y Y E609.5 Automatic Daylight Controls Y N N E



Atta

chm

ent (

Y or

N/A

)

Requ

ired

by V

EES C

ompl

ianc

e M

atrix

(Y/N

)

Appl

icab

le to

Pro

ject

(Y/N

)

To B

e Ac

hiev

ed o

n Pr

ojec

t (Y/

N)


n/Co

nstr

uctio

n (D

/C)

Resp

onsi

ble

Part

y (O

, GC,

C, A

, S, P

, M, E

)

609.6 Plug Load Controls N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix609.7 Fuel Gas Lighting Systems Y N N Not Applicable for this project.609.8 Electrical System Efficiency Y Y Y E609.9 Exterior Lighting Y Y Y E609.10 Verification of Lamps and Ballasts Y Y Y E610.1 General - Specific Appliances and Equipment Y Y Y E610.2 Permanent Appliances and Equipment Y Y Y E610.3 Portable Appliances and Equipment Y Y Y Appliances only E611.1 Renewable Energy Systems Y N N Not applicable based on minor exterior scope of work E611.2 Solar Photovoltaic Systems Y N N Not applicable based on minor exterior scope of work E611.3 Wind Energy Systems Y N N Not applicable based on minor exterior scope of work E611.4 Solar Water Heating Equipment Y Y Y Solar Water Heaters to be included as part of the work. P611.5 Renewable Energy System Performance Monitoring and Metering N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

612.1 Mechanical Systems Commissioning and Completion Requirements Y Y YCommissioning will be included with the project, acommissioning plan will be provided M

612.2 Lighting and Electrical Systems Commissioning and Completion Req's Y Y YCommissioning will be included; but Post occupancycommissioning will be the responsibility of the VCCS M

612.3 Building Envelope Systems Commissioning and Completion Req's N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix613.1 General - Jurisdictional Requirements and Project Electives N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

613.2 Post Certificate of Occupancy TANEU, Energy Demand, and CO2eEmissions Monitoring


613.3 TANEU Reduction N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix613.4 Building Thermal Envelope Systems N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix613.5 Mechanical Systems Commissioning and Completion Requirements N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix613.6 Passive Design N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

Chapter 7 702.1 Fitting and Fixture Consumption Y Y Y 1.28 gpf toilets, .125 gpf urinals, .5 gpm lavatory faucets P702.2 Combination Tub and Shower Valves Y N N Refer to comments from Section 403.2.702.3 Food Establishment Pre-Rinse Spray Heads Y N N No food establishments in project.702.4 Drinking Fountain Controls Y Y Y P702.5 Nonwater Urinal Connection Y N N Facilities management does not approve of waterless.702.6 Appliances Y N N Not Applicable P702.7 Municipal Reclaimed Water N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix702.8 Efficient Hot Water Distribution Systems Y Y Y P702.9 Trap Priming Water N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix702.10 Makeup Water Supply N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix702.11 Water Powered Pumps Y N N Not Applicable P702.12 Food Service Handwashing Faucets Y N N No food service in project.702.13 Dipper Wells Y N N No food service in project.702.14 Automated Vehicle Facilities N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix702.15 Self-Service Vehicle Wash Facilities N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix702.16 Vehicle Washing Facilities N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix702.17 Covers Y N N No spas in project.702.18 Splash Troughs Y N N No swimming pools in project.702.19 Covers Y N N No swimming pools in project.703.1 Hydronic Closed Systems N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix703.2 Humidification Systems Y N N Humidification system are not applicable to the project P703.3 Condensate Coolers and Tempering Y N N Existing Hot Water Plant703.4 Condensate Drainage Recovery N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix703.5 Heat Exchangers Y N N Not Applicable for this project.703.6 Humidifier Discharge N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix704.1 Water Softeners Y N N Not Applicable for this project.704.2 Reverse Osmosis Water Treatment Systems Y N N Not Applicable for this project.705.1 Indoor Ornamental Fountains and Water Features N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix705.2 Metering N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix706.1 Scope - Non-Potable Water Requirements Y N N Not Applicable for this project.706.2 Signage Required Y N N Not Applicable for this project.706.3 Water Quality Y N N Not Applicable for this project.707 Rainwater Collection and Distribution Systems Y N N Not Applicable for this project.708 Graywater Systems N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix709 Reclaimed Water Systems N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix710.1 Project Electives N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix



Atta

chm

ent (

Y or

N/A

)

Requ

ired

by V

EES C

ompl

ianc

e M

atrix

(Y/N

)

Appl

icab

le to

Pro

ject

(Y/N

)

To B

e Ac

hiev

ed o

n Pr

ojec

t (Y/

N)


n/Co

nstr

uctio

n (D

/C)

Resp

onsi

ble

Part

y (O

, GC,

C, A

, S, P

, M, E

)

Chapter 8801.2 Indoor Air Quality Management Plan Required Y Y Y An IAQ Management plan will be developed C GC802.1 Scope - Building Construction Features, Operations and Maintenance

FacilitationY Y Y Will comply with sections 802.2-802.5

802.2 Air Handling System Access Y Y Y Access will be provided as required in this section M

802.3 Durability and Cleanability of Air Handling Surfaces Y Y YAir handling surfaces shall be constructed in accordance to thissection, metal D/C M/GC

802.4 Air Handling System Filters Y Y Y Filter racks will be designed to prevent bypassing. M802.5 Insulation Materials Above Suspended Ceilings and In Air Plenums Y Y Y Duct liners will not be used. M803.1 Construction Phase Requirements Y Y Y C GC803.2 Temperature and Humidity Y Y Y The Temperature and humidity are in accordance to ASHRAE 55 M803.3 Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix803.4 Isolation of Pollutant Sources Y Y Y Pollutant sources shall be exhausted at .5 cfm/sf D A803.5 Ductless System and Filters Y Y Y Ductless Split systems shall include MERV 6 filters M804.1 Fireplaces and Appliances Y N N No fireplaces in project.804.2 Radon Mitigation Y N N Existing slab to remain.804.3 Building Flush Out Y Y Y C GC805.1 Scope - Asbestos Use Prevention N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix806.1 Interior Pressed Wood Y Y Y Where applicable D A

806.2 Adhesives and Sealants Y Y Y Maintenance is an issue and will be considered in the selectionof these. All may not meet section. D A

806.3 Architectural Paints and Coatings Y Y YMaintenance is an issue and will be considered in the selectionof these. All may not meet section. D A

806.4 Flooring Y Y Y D A806.5 Acoustical Ceiling Tiles and Wall Systems Y Y Y D A806.6 Insulation Y Y Y D A807.1 Sound Transmission Y Y Y807.2 Exterior Sound Transmission Y Y N Not Applicable 807.3 Interior Sound Transmission Y Y Y D A807.4 Mechanical and Emergency Generator Equipment and Systems Y N N Not Applicable D A807.5 Special Inspections for Sound Transmission N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

808.1 General - Daylighting Y Y NAbundance of natural daylighting is problematic for precisionmachining and technical programming requirements. As muchdaylighting is being provided where possible. D A

808.2 Applicability Y YMeeting to the best of our ability considering this is an existingbuilding. Have added glass where possible. D A

808.3 Daylighting of Building Spaces Y YMeeting to the best of our ability considering this is an existingbuilding. Have added glass where possible. D A

809.1 General - Project Electives N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix809.2 VOC Emissions N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix809.3 Views to Building Exterior N N N Not Applicable

Chapter 9902.1 Approved Agency Y Y Y Commissioning will be included M903.1 General - Commissioning (Pre Occupancy) Y Y Y Commissioning will be included M903.1.2 General - Commissioning (Post Occupancy) Y Y Y VCCS will hire someone outside of this contract. O904.1 General - Building Operations, Maintenance and Owner Education Y Y Y O/GC904.2 Record Documents Y Y Y GC904.3 Building Operations and Maintenance Documents Y Y Y GC904.4 Building Owner Education Manual Y Y Y May be an abbreviated version due to existing conditions. GC

Chapter 101001.2 Building Operations and Maintenance N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1001.3 Compliance Y Y Y1001.4 Building Materials, Assemblies and Systems N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1002.1 General - Additions N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1003.1 General - Alterations to Existing Buildings N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1003.2 Minimum Energy, HVAC and Water Requirements N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1003.3 Additional Requirements N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1004.1 Change of Occupancy N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1005.1 Historic Buildings N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1006.1 Conformance N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1007.1 General - Jurisdictional Requirements N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix



Atta

chm

ent (

Y or

N/A

)

Requ

ired

by V

EES C

ompl

ianc

e M

atrix

(Y/N

)

Appl

icab

le to

Pro

ject

(Y/N

)

To B

e Ac

hiev

ed o

n Pr

ojec

t (Y/

N)


n/Co

nstr

uctio

n (D

/C)

Resp

onsi

ble

Part

y (O

, GC,

C, A

, S, P

, M, E

)

1007.2 Demolition N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1007.3 Sale of Existing Buildings and Tenant Spaces N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1007.4 Evaluation and Certification of Existing Buildings and Building Sites N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix

Chapter 111101.2 Operation and Maintenance N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1101.3 Compliance Y Y Y1101.4 Building Site Materials, Systems and Landscaping N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1102.1 General - Additions N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1103.1 General - Additions to Existing Building Sites N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1103.2 Changes to Hardscapes and Surface Vehicle Parking N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1104.1 Conformance N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1104.2 Building Site Improvements N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix1105.1 Historic Building Sites N N N Not Applicable per DGS-30-382 Compliance Matrix


lodea

Typewritten Text






SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy

requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for temporary protection of

existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition.

3. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-

grade improvements not part of selective demolition.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent

damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent

damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.






1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of

materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress

and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates

exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the

measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection.

Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

2. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible

for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that

recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of

technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after

completion of selective demolition.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.







A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved

certification program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner

as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. All furniture, equipment and miscellaneous loose items.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before

proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. Refer

to the Appendix No.1 - Hazardous Materials Inspection report. Examine report to become

aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material abatement is the responsibility of the General Contractor and

shall be removed by a licensed Abatement Contractor in accordance with all federal

regulations.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building

demolition operations.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings,

preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

salvage operations.

2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be

reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,

materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving

areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by

Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.






4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and

cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with

same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect,

and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and

remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and

plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition

of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water

leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that

are exposed during selective demolition operations.

3. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and

cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports

as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of

construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement

or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective

demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.






3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within

limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.

Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing

supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining

construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,

not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid

marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-

suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials

and promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to

avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.






4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and

soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to

a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled

in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them

according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste


B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective

demolition operations began.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Remove:

1. Paint Booth and associated equipment

2. All walls, windows, doors, roofing, finishes, plumbing, mechanical and electrical

systems indicated to be removed on the drawings.

B. Remove and Reinstall:

1. All bookstore shelving, display cases, and slat wall system except for checkout desk.

2. Automotive lifts from existing automotive shops.

3. Monorail overhead hoist system.

C. Existing to Remain:






1. Dynamometer.

2. Automotive exhaust system.






SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 024120 - 1

SECTION 024120 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplemental

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of existing asphalt and/or concrete pavement, concrete

and/or asphalt walks, concrete slab and/or foundation, curbs and gutters, and all

other exterior site items indicated or not indicated which interfere with the Work.

2. Removal and/or relocation of existing underground utilities.

3. Removal and disposal of existing sanitary sewer pipe, water pipe, storm drainage

pipe and appurtenances indicated.

4. Removal of existing light poles.

5. Section 011000 “Summary” for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-

occupancy requirements, and phasing requirement.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,

salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property.

B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's

property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify

contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them

for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in

locations indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Protect items indicated to remain against damage and soiling. When

permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location

and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.






1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise

indicated to remain the Owner's property, remove demolished materials from the site with

further disposition at the Contractor's option and expense.

B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

C. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and

their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or

value to the Owner, which may be encountered, remain the Owner's property. Carefully

remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver

promptly to the Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Record drawings at Project closeout.

1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,

electrical, or mechanical conditions.

B. Proposed dust-control measures.

C. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and

ending dates for each activity.

2. Coordination for continuation of utility services.

3. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work.

D. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged or turned over to Owner.

E. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility

licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

F. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.


A. Regulatory Requirements: All work shall comply with Federal, State and Local laws and

regulations concerning hauling and disposal of demolition debris.

B. Notify the proper agencies prior to the start of work and obtain all necessary permits for

this work.






C. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved

certification program.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be

demolished. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be

maintained by the Owner to the extent practical. However, minor variations may occur due

to Owner’s removal and salvage operations prior to the start of demolition work.

B. The location of existing underground utilities indicated is approximate only. Field locate

all existing underground utilities in the area of work, regardless of whether or not they are

indicated. Call “Miss Utility” prior to the start of demolition work for assistance in the

location of existing underground utilities.

C. Should charted, uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities be encountered during demolition,

contact the Architect immediately for instructions. Cooperate with Owner and utility

companies to keep services and facilities in operation.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Verify that all required relocation and/or removal of existing underground utilities, poles,

meters or other above ground appurtenances has been accomplished with the appropriate

utility company (i.e. power, telephone, cable and natural gas/propane) prior to the start of

selective demolition work.

1.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

A. Do not use explosives to perform selective site demolition work.

1.10 PREDEMOLITION CONFERENCE

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review sizes and weights of portable structure to be removed.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of

materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress

and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates

exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Call “Miss Utility” prior to the start of demolition work for assistance in the location of

existing underground utilities. Field locate all existing underground utilities in the area of

work, regardless of whether or not they are indicated.

B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted existing utilities be identified, contact the Architect

immediately for instructions. Provide a scale drawing with the location of the uncharted or

incorrectly charted utilities for use by the Architect in preparing additional direction.

C. Verify that utilities indicated as removed, abandoned and/or relocated have been

disconnected and capped.

D. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required.

E. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be

removed and salvaged and turned over to the Owner.

3.2 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives,

acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective

demolition operations.

B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with

roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing

regulations.






C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent

buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective

demolition area.

D. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.

E. Barricade areas of demolition occurring as part of this work, and post with warning lights

as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Protect structures, buildings, utilities, walks, pavements, existing vegetation and other

facilities to remain from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,

washout and other hazards created by demolition operations.

3.3 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia

Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and those of the local Erosion Control official.

B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by the Work.

Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.

3.4 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Utilities

1. Coordinate the reinstallation of utilities with the appropriate utility companies.

2. Remove existing utility lines and/or conduits indicated as being removed and

terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the

specific utility and to local jurisdictional codes.

3. Provide adequate means of support and protection during demolition and other

construction operations for existing utilities that are to remain in place. Repair

utilities damaged by construction operations to the satisfaction of the utility owner at

the contractor’s expense.

B. Asphalt Pavement

1. Remove asphalt concrete pavement by sawcutting to the full depth of the pavement.

Provide neat sawcuts at the limits of pavement removal indicated.

C. Concrete Pavement, Walks and Curbs

1. Remove concrete pavement and walks to the nearest joint. Sawcut concrete if joints

are not present adjacent to the area of demolition.

2. Sawcut concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Break out

remainder of concrete, provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished






work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face

cannot be concealed, grind smooth or sawcut entirely through concrete.

D. Light Poles

1. Remove light poles as indicated. A) If light poles are owned by a public utility,

coordinate returning them to the utility. B) If light poles are the property of Owner,

remove and dispose of at the contractor’s expense.

E. Sanitary sewer pipe, water pipe, storm drain pipe and appurtances

1. Remove all sanitary sewer pipe, water pipe and storm pipe indicated as being

removed.

2. Remove all sanitary sewer, water and storm apputances and structures indicated as

being removed.

F. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to

accumulate on-site.

B. Do not burn demolished materials or debris.

C. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off of Owner's property at the

Contractor’s expense.

3.6 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of demolition work remove all tools, equipment and demolition materials

from site. Remove demolition work area protection and leave areas clean.

B. Repair any demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of

construction and surfaces to remain to the condition existing prior to the start of

construction. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition

work.






ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213 - 1

SECTION 028213 - ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

The work includes the removal and disposal of friable and non-friable materials containing

asbestos indicated and specified herein and the incidental procedures and equipment required

to protect workers from contact with airborne asbestos fibers. The Contractor shall furnish all

labor, materials, services, insurance and equipment required for the removal and disposal of

asbestos-containing materials in accordance with the guidelines or regulations of the

responsible state agency, the local agency, EPA or OSHA. The work includes, but is not

necessarily limited to the following:

A. All preparation of the work areas and areas outside the work areas prior to beginning

asbestos removal work.

B. Removal and disposal of all asbestos materials and waste materials contaminated with

asbestos during the process of the work and any other debris generated by this project.

Asbestos containing or contaminated material present at Danville Community

College, Engineering & Industrial Technology Building includes but may not be

limited to the following:

FLOOR TILE & MASTIC

Approx. 10,350 SF (includes FT&M on stairs)

CEILING TILE

Approx. 385 SF

ROOF FLASHING on CMU SCREEN WALLS

Approx. 480 LF

ALL FOOTAGE AND AMOUNTS ARE APPROXIMATE AND SHOULD BE FIELD-

VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR DURING SITE VISIT.

C. Complete cleaning and decontamination of all work areas and contents thereof.

1.2 TERMINOLOGY:

A. Amended Water: Water containing a wetting agent of surfactant.

B. Asbestos Control Area: An area where asbestos removal operations are performed which

is isolated by physical boundaries to prevent the release of asbestos dust, fibers, or debris.

C. Authorized Visitor: The Owner's representative, or a representative of any regulatory or

other agency having jurisdiction over the project.

D. Friable Asbestos Material: Material when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized or reduced

to powder by hand pressure and includes previously non-friable material after such






previously non-friable material becomes damaged to the extent that when dry is may be

crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure.

E. HEPA Filter Equipment: High-efficiency particulate air filtered vacuuming equipment

with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers. Filters shall be of

99.97 percent efficiency for retaining fibers of 0.3 microns or larger.

F. Negative Pressure: A local exhaust system capable of maintaining a minimum pressure

differential of minus 0.02 inch of water column relative to adjacent unsealed areas.

G. Non-friable Asbestos Material: Material that contains asbestos in which the fibers have

been locked in by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material so that the asbestos is

well bound and will not release fibers during any appropriate use, handling, demolition,

storage, transportation, processing or disposal.

H. Owner's Representative: Person designated in the contract as authorized individual (or his

designee) to represent and mediate for the Owner in administration of the Contract.

I. Project Monitor: One or more individuals employed by the Owner to inspect the Work

and/or to act as clerk of the works to the extent required by the Owner. The Owner shall

notify the Contractor in writing of the appointment of such Project Monitor(s).

J. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing

the quality of water required for a given operation or area.

K. Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating asbestos contamination from building surfaces

and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools which have been dampened with

water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as asbestos-contaminated waste.

1.3 CONFORMANCE TO REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

A. In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, the contractor shall comply with

laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal, state, regional, and local authorities

regarding handling, storing, transporting and disposing of asbestos waste materials.

Comply with the applicable requirements of the current issue of the following regulatory

agencies:

1. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1926.1101 (OSHA) Occupational

Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor and the Virginia

Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Industry, Department of Labor and

Industry Construction.

2. Title 40, Part 61, Subparts A and B. Regional National Emissions Standards for

Hazardous Air Pollutants. (EPA) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

3. 40 CFR Part 763 Subpart E, Appendix D.






B. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for

resolution before starting the work. Where the requirements of this specification and

referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.

C. When necessary for friable ACM, written notification shall be made to:

1. Department of Labor and Industry

Attn: Accounting/Finance

Main Street Centre

600 East Main Street, Suite 207

Richmond, Virginia 23219

2. Asbestos Coordinator

USEPA Region III

Mail Code 3LC62

1650 Arch Street

Philadelphia, PA 19103-2029

3. Notification shall be sent not later than 20 days prior to commencement of the

work with a copy sent for the Owner's Representative. Notification shall be on a

Form provided by the Commonwealth of Virginia, Department of Labor and

Industry.

1.4 BUILDING PROTECTION:

The asbestos control area shall be maintained under negative pressure at all times of a minimum of

.02 inches of water column relative to adjacent unsealed area. A minimum of 4 air changes per

hour is required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

Submittals shall be made in accordance with procedures set forth in Section 01 33 23 "Submittals."

A. Notification to Regulatory Agencies: Submit a copy of the notification of the proposed

asbestos work as required under paragraph "Conformance to Regulatory Requirements."

B. Asbestos Plan: Submit a detailed plan of the work procedures to be used in the removal

and demolition of materials containing asbestos. Such plan shall include interface of trades

involved in the construction, sequencing of asbestos related work, disposal plan, type of

wetting agent to be used, air monitoring, and a detailed description of the method to be

employed in order to control pollution. Plan shall be approved prior to start of the work.

C. Testing Laboratory: Submit the name, address, telephone number, and copy of the VA

Asbestos Laboratory License of the testing laboratory selected for the monitoring of the






airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers along with certification that persons counting the

samples have been judged proficient by successful participation in the National Institute

for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT)

Program.

D. Disposal: Must comply with 40 CFR Part 763 Subpart E Appendix D

1. Submit evidence that all required permits for transport disposal of asbestos

containing or contaminate materials, supplies, and the like have been obtained.

2. Submit certified copies from the operator of the asbestos disposal site that the

asbestos has been received, within 30 days of removal, specifying quantities and

dates of delivery.

E. Employee Qualification, Virginia Licensure Requirements:

1. Submit documentation indicating that all employees have had instruction on the

hazards of asbestos exposure, on use and fitting of respirators, on protective dress,

on use of showers, on entry and exit from work areas, and on all aspects of work

procedures and protective measures, in accordance with OSHA and the EPA.

2. Submit documentation of each employee's asbestos medical examination.

F. Respirator Program: Submit a copy of the company’s written respirator program in

compliance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor shall have a copy of his written

respirator program available on the job site at all times. Start job with appropriate

respiratory protection based on a Negative Exposure Assessment (NEA) and ensure that

fiber concentration inside mask does not exceed .01 fibers/cc. Use historic or objective

data, documenting expected fiber count levels, to prove the proposed respiratory protection

is adequate or an OSHA required Negative Exposure Assessment.

G. Submit a written Assured Equipment Grounding Program and a Lock Out and Tag Out

Program. Provide proof that programs are in effect and being enforced.

H. Equipment: Submit manufacturer's certification that vacuums, ventilation equipment, and

other equipment required to contain airborne fibers conform to ANSI 29.2-79.

I. Submit proof of valid Virginia asbestos licenses for contractor, supervisor and workers.

1.6 PERSONNEL PROTECTION:

A. Provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory equipment in accordance

with Paragraph "Equipment." Where respirators with disposable filters are employed,

provide sufficient filters for replacement as required by the worker or applicable regulation.

B. Provide workers with sufficient sets of protective full-body clothing. Such clothing shall

consist of full-body overalls and headgear, gloves and foot coverings. Provide hard hats






as required by applicable safety regulations. Non-disposable-type protective clothing and

footwear shall be left in the contaminated equipment room until the end of the abatement

work, at which time such items shall be disposed of as asbestos waste, bagged and removed

as asbestos-contaminated or shall be thoroughly cleaned of all asbestos or asbestos-

containing material. Disposable-type protective clothing, headgear, gloves and footwear

will be provided.

C. Provide authorized visitors with suitable protective clothing, headgear, gloves, eye

protection and footwear, as described herein, whenever they are required to enter the work

area.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Sheeting: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 6 mils thick unless otherwise specified, in sizes

to minimize the frequency of joints.

B. Tape: Glass fibers or other type capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene

sheets and for attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of

dissimilar materials under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water.

C. Surfactant (Wetting Agent): Shall consist of 50-percent polyoxylethylene ether and 50

percent of polyoxylethylene or polyglycol ester, or equivalent and shall be mixed with

water to provide a concentration of 1 ounce surfactant to 5 gallons of water.

D. Impermeable Containers: Containers shall be suitable to receive and retain any asbestos-

containing or contaminated materials until disposable at an approved site. They may be

in the form of polyethylene bags, sealed cardboard containers, or fiber drums. The

containers shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.58,

NESHAP 40 CFR Part 61, and DOT Regulations. Containers shall be both airtight and

watertight.

2.2 EQUIPMENT:

Air-Handling Equipment: Equipment shall be a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA)

filtration system, equipped with filtration equipment in compliance with ANSI 29.2-79, and a

monitoring device, known as a manometer, to continuously gauge and record negative pressure

conditions. Manometer tape to be retained by Contractor for future reference by Owner if

necessary. No air-movement system or air equipment shall discharge asbestos fibers outside

the work area. Pressure shall be maintained at a minimum of -.02 inches of water column

relative to adjacent unsealed areas. A minimum of 1 air change every 15 minutes will be

required.

PART 3 – EXECUTION






3.1 PREPARATION OF WORK AREAS:

A. Provide temporary power sources and equipment per applicable electrical code

requirements and provide 24-volt safety lighting and ground-fault interrupter circuits as

power source for electrical equipment.

B. Seal off all openings, including, but not limited to, corridors, doorways, skylights, ducts,

grilles, diffusers, and any other penetrations of the work areas, with plastic sheeting sealed

with tape. Doorways and corridors which will not be used for passage during work must

be sealed with barriers as described in Paragraph "Decontamination Enclosure Systems."

C. Cover surfaces that aren’t being removed, with plastic sheeting sealed with tape. Use a

minimum of two layers of minimum 6-mil plastic on floors and walls. Cover floors first

so that plastic extends at least 12 inches up on walls, then cover walls with a minimum of

6-mil plastic sheeting to the floor level.

D. Maintain emergency and fire exits from the work areas, or establish alternative exits

satisfactory to the applicable fire officials.

E. Provide 5.0-micron filters on all shower drains. Asbestos-contaminated waste water is to

be placed in a sanitary sewer system after filtration through the 5.0 micron filter.

F. After preparation of the work areas and decontamination enclosure systems, remove

Asbestos Containing Building Material as required.

3.2 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS:

A. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: Construct a worker decontamination

enclosure system contiguous to the work area consisting of three totally enclosed chambers

and air locks as follows:

1. An equipment room with two curtained doors, one to the work area and one to the

air lock.

2. Air lock with two curtained doors, one to equipment room and one to shower room.

3. A shower room with two curtained doorways, one to the air lock on work room

side and one to the air lock on the clean room side. The shower room shall contain

at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water. Careful attention shall be

paid to the shower enclosure to ensure against leaking of any kind. Ensure a supply

of liquid soap at all times in the shower room.

4. Air lock with two curtained doors, one to shower room and one to clean room.

5. A clean room with two curtained doors, one to the air lock on the shower side and

one to the exterior. Clean room shall be constructed to meet or exceed

requirements of OSHA Regulations.






6. Separation of Work Areas from Occupied Areas: Separate parts of the building

required to remain in use from parts of the building that will undergo asbestos

abatement by means of airtight barriers.

B. Maintenance of Enclosure Systems:

1. Ensure that barriers and plastic linings are effectively sealed and taped. Repair

damaged barriers and remedy defects immediately upon discovery.

2. Visually inspect enclosures at the beginning of each work period.

3. Use smoke methods to test effectiveness of barriers when directed by the Project

Monitor.

3.3 AIR MONITORING:

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide daily air monitoring both in and outside the work area throughout all

asbestos stripping, removal and cleaning. Outside monitoring samples shall be

taken by the Project Monitor.

2. Samples shall be collected by calibrated pumps whose flow rates can be

determined to an accuracy of plus or minus 5%. Calibrate pumps with a

representative filter in line.

3. Personal air monitoring shall be in compliance with 1926.1101 of the OSHA

standards.

4. Analysis of samples shall be done in compliance with OSHA standards 1926.1101

by a competent trained person or laboratory.

5. The sampling schedule shall be posted outside of the containment area showing

sample frequency, duration of the sample, and pump flow rates.

6. Results of all samples shall be posted outside of the containment area within 24

hours of collection, and maintained there until the job has been concluded. This

data shall include the results of 8-hour TWA determinations. Posted results should

include a synopsis of work activities of which the results are representative.

B. Air Monitoring by Contractor:

1. Throughout the removal and cleaning operations, personal air monitoring shall be

conducted by a Testing Laboratory employed by the Contractor or by the

Contractor's personnel. Air monitoring shall be performed to provide the following

samples:






a. work area environmental,

b. personal breathing 8-hour TWA and excursion,

Samples for air monitoring shall be collected by a competent person in accordance

with methods prescribed in the Federal OSHA Industrial Hygiene Field Operations

Manual or by equivalent.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for personnel and environmental air

monitoring samples taken inside the work compartment and all costs in connection

with testing and air sampling shall be borne by the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall determine the release of asbestos from any work or waste

storage area is not taking place at concentrations higher than .01 actual fibers/cc.

4. All analytical results shall be presented as signed "Certificates of Analysis." Form

shall state:

a. date and time sampling began

b. flow rate of samples

c. sampling time elapsed

d. concentration in fibers/cc

e. site/individual sampled

f. synopsis of work activities which sample was taken

g. name and signature of analysts

5. Two copies of analytical results shall be delivered in writing to the job site within

24 hours of sample collection (excluding non-working days). A copy of the results

shall be submitted to the Project Monitor when received by the Contractor.

6. Analytical results indicating potential for a hazard higher than limits set forth in

this section shall be reported immediately, by the most expeditious means possible,

either telephone or carrier, to the Owner’s Project Monitor.

7. The Project Monitor shall inform the Contractor and the Owner immediately of

any area samples outside of the containment with results in excess of .01 fibers/cc

actual.

8. Operations shall be discontinued immediately any time emissions are observed

emanating from the work area.

9. Contractor will provide a written plan to the Owner stating steps to be undertaken

to assure compliance with all regulations, including but not limited to the

following:

a. qualifications of personnel taking and analyzing samples

b. containment procedures






c. respirator program

d. sampling strategy

3.4 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT:

A. Spray asbestos material with amended water, using spray equipment capable of providing

a "mist" application to reduce the release of fibers. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet

it to the substrate without causing excess dripping or delamination of the material. Spray

the asbestos material repeatedly during work process to maintain wet condition and to

minimize asbestos fiber dispersion.

B. Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections. As it is removed, pack the

material in sealable plastic bags of 6-mil minimum thickness and place in labeled

containers or a second plastic bag of 6-mil minimum thickness for transport. If the

Contractor chooses plastic bags for transport, the double-bag method of containment will

be used. Material shall not be allowed to dry out prior to insertion into the original sealable,

plastic bag.

C. Seal filled containers. Place danger labels on containers in accordance with OSHA

regulation 29 CFR 1926.58. Additional labeling indicating the name of the waste generator

and the location where the waste was generated shall be affixed to each container in

accordance with NESHAP regulation 40 CFR Part 61. Clean external surfaces of

containers thoroughly by wet sponging in the designated area of the work area which is

part of the equipment decontamination enclosure system. Move containers to washroom,

wet clean each container thoroughly, and move to holding area pending removal from the

holding area by workers who have entered from uncontaminated areas dressed in clean

coveralls. Ensure that workers do not enter from uncontaminated areas into the washroom

or the work area; ensure that contaminated workers do not exit the work area through the

equipment decontamination enclosure system.

D. After completion of stripping work, all surfaces from which asbestos has been removed or

contaminated shall be wire brushed and/or wet sponged or cleaned by an equivalent method

to remove all visible material. During this work, the surfaces being cleaned shall be kept

wet.

3.5 GLOVE BAG REMOVAL:

A. All glove bag work will be performed within a controlled area. The controlled area is

established by installing critical barriers of minimum 6-mil poly over any doors or other

openings as needed. Negative air is to be maintained in this controlled area at all times

from initial disturbance of material until final clearance is certified. The use of a negative

air glove bag will not preclude this requirement.

B. Attach glove bag to pipe with ends and top seam securely taped. Leave enough slack in

bag so that bag can be lifted at least 3 inches above pipe at center of attached length.

C. Have all tools needed for removal inside bag, prior to attachment of bag.






D. Insert and seal hoses for HEPA vac and amended water sprayer.

E. One person sprays amended water and control HEPA vac hose while other person removes

insulation and cleans pipe.

F. Place tools into glove, pull to outside, and double-tie glove for tool removal. Cut between

ties.

G. After all insulation is removed and pipe cleaning is finished, continue to ventilate the bag

for 3 minutes. Adjust airflow to allow full bag venting.

H. Remove the HEPA vac and water hoses and seal openings.

I. While vacuuming along the top seal of the bag, remove the bag, twist the top and seal with

tape with the top doubled down.

J. Place sealed glove bag into labeled asbestos disposal bag and seal.

K. Plastic floor drop cloth and wall poly may be moved as needed, provided that no visible

contamination has accumulated. If any contamination exists or job is completed, this poly

is to be properly double-bagged and disposed of as asbestos waste.

3.6 CLEANUP:

A. Remove visible accumulations of asbestos material and debris. Wet clean all surfaces

within the work area.

B. The windows and doors shall remain sealed and any HEPA-filtered negative air pressure

systems, air filtration, and decontamination enclosure systems shall remain in service until

final clearance is certified.

C. Clean all surfaces in the work area and any other contaminated areas with water and/or

with HEPA-filtered vacuum equipment. After completion of the second cleaning

operation, perform a complete visual inspection of the work area to ensure that the work

area is free of visible asbestos debris.

D. Sealed drums and all equipment used in the work area shall be included in the cleanup and

shall be removed from work areas, via the equipment decontamination enclosure system,

at an appropriate time in the cleaning sequence. The transport vehicle shall be lined with

two layers of minimum 6-mil. polyethylene sheeting.

E. If the Project Monitor, within 24 hours, finds visible accumulations of asbestos debris in

the work area, the Contractor shall repeat the wet cleaning until the work area is in

compliance, at the Contractor's expense.






F. Final air samples will be taken by the Owner’s Virginia Licensed Project Monitor and

certify not to exceed .01 f/cc using the NIOSH 7400 PCM method of analysis. If the final

air samples do not meet acceptable standards, the Contractor shall be held responsible for

the cost of subsequent air samples. Aggressive air sampling will be required on this project.

All exits, vents, and critical barriers shall remain sealed and negative air machines will

remain on until final clearance is certified.

G. When applicable, the Contractor shall provide necessary electrical outlets for air clearance

equipment.

3.7 DISPOSAL:

Comply with 40 CFR PART 763 SUBPART E APPENDIX D, the Virginia Department of

Environmental Quality and the Virginia Department of Transportation.

A. Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Materials and Asbestos-Contaminated Waste: As the

work progresses and to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on site, remove sealed

and labeled containers of asbestos waste and dispose of such at an authorized disposal site

in accordance with the requirements of disposal authority. Submit documentation

regarding disposal to Owner within 30 days of removal.

B. Procedure for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61 (Sub-part B), state,

regional, and local standards. If drums are chosen as the container for the disposal bags,

the bags will be removed by hand from drums into the burial site unless the bags have been

broken or damaged. Damaged bags shall remain in the drum and the entire contaminated

drum shall be buried. Uncontaminated drums may be recycled. If the double bag method

of containment was used, the entire waste package shall be hand placed into the burial site.

Workers shall wear appropriate respirators and personal protective equipment when

handling asbestos materials at the jobsite and at the disposal site.

C. All procedures are to follow NESHAP regulations, the Virginia Department of

Environmental Quality Regulations and the Virginia Department of Transportation

Regulations.



RENOVATE ENGINEERING AND INDUSTRIAL RRMM PROJECT NO. :13167-02



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS

033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 312000 "Earthwork for Buildings" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each

entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the

following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete Subcontractor.

e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field

quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting

procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and






033000 - 2

joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation,

anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement

installation, and concrete protection.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent

bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop

spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

1. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures and

dimensioned opening locations. Include applicable dimensions, sections, elevations,

and details required to complete installation and coordination of the details, and

typical details. Plan shall be drawn at a scale of no less than 1/8” per foot.


A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Floor and slab treatments.

7. Bonding agents.

8. Adhesives.

9. Vapor retarders.

10. Joint-filler strips.

11. Repair materials.

B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion

of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

C. Field quality-control reports.






033000 - 3

D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength

Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing

agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing

Technician, Grade II.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work

from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or

low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg° Ffor three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.






033000 - 4

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg° F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent

of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool

concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.

Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the

Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301.

2. ACI 117.

3. ACI 315.

4. CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice.”

2.2 ACI 318

2.3 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.






033000 - 5

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent

spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inchto the plane of exposed

concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in

concrete surface.

2.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064, as drawn.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn

steel wire into flat sheets.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and

fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar

supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of

Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand

from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain

admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, gray.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10






033000 - 6

years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar

aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inchnominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures

and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in

hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

F. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A with a minimum thickness of 15 mils.

Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,

weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of

floor covering.






033000 - 7

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic

fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid

curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of

grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent

floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,

conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psiat 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

3. Slag Cement: 50 percent.

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement

minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.






033000 - 8

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of

cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in

concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,

low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a w/c ratio

below 0.50.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Slump Limit: 5 inches, or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or

minus 1 inch.

B. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd.

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg° F, reduce mixing and delivery time

from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg° F, reduce

mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.






033000 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support

vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,

until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as

follows:

1. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces.

Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support

screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of

formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely

braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at

inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and

bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such

items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,

and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks

and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.






033000 - 10

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work

that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after

cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg° F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete

has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and

protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing materials are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete

surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder

before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.






033000 - 11

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps

with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement

through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least

one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when

cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete

develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at

slab junctions with vertical surfaces as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length

is required, lace or clip sections together.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.






033000 - 12

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no

new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as

indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design

pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI

301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least

6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete

that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to

time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement

and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within

limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie

holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed

specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch

tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on

formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.






033000 - 13

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching

adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly

across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is

small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low

spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,

granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is

free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface

defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient

flooring, carpet, ceramic, or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or

another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a

randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.

D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or

quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still

plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming

with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final

finish with Architect before application.






033000 - 14

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is

in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend

with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or

required to complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base

not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of

supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor

support.


4. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

5. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for

proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-

weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,

or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x hbefore and during

finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,

screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for

remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with

the following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.






033000 - 15

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends

lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using

cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-

retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not

interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy

rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and

repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere

with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain

continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove

and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-

1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and

placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.






033000 - 16

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more

than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make

edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and

brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching

mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or

cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly

higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish

and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test

surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish

repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair

underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas

with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch

clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and

apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as

original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to

blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching

mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust,

dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.

Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and

finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least

72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive

and patching mortar.






033000 - 17

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.13 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Special Inspections will be performed by the Special Inspector or the Special Inspector’s

Agency.

B. Verification and inspection of concrete construction shall be in accordance with Section

1705.3 of Virginia Construction Code 2012 and as follows:

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Headed bolts and studs.

3. Verification of use of required design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each

additional 50.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five

randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but

not less than one test for each day’s pour of each concrete mixture. Perform

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40

deg° F and below or 80 deg° F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.






033000 - 18

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a

set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age

indicated.

b. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any

three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified

compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below

specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

7. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall

contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of

concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design

compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,

compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

8. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device

may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or

rejection of concrete.

9. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of

concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths,

or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and

inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored

cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.






POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 1

SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polished concrete finishing, including staining/dying (if required – if

polishing through oil caked area does not achieve desired color – determined with test

sample area).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that

reflects acceptable surface quality and appearance of polished concrete.



1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each

entity directly concerned with polished concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Cast-in-place concrete subcontractor.

e. Polished concrete finishing Subcontractor.

2. Review cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction

joints, concrete repair procedures, concrete finishing, and protection of polished

concrete.



B. Sustainable Design Submittals:






1. Laboratory Test Reports: For stains and penetrating dyes (if required), indicating

compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

C. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of

polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations.

Include locations of all joints, including construction joints.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product requiring color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Repair materials.

2. Stain/dye (if required) materials.

3. Liquid floor treatments.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer has a minimum of 5 years ‘experience in manufacturing components

similar to or exceeding requirements of project.

2. Manufacturer must be able to provide technically trained field representative during

construction and approving application method.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in

installation work similar to that required for this project.

2. Installer trained and having current certification for RetroPlate (or approved equal)

Concrete Polishing System.

C. Mock-Ups:

1. Mock-up size Approx: 10'x10' floor area at job site, at location as directed under

conditions similar to those which will exist during actual placement (in worst oil-caked

area(s). Divide mock-up area into 4 equal zones, allowing for sequential attempts to

determine amount of aggregate exposure and color (if required) and shine selection.

2. Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, concrete substrate preparation

operation of equipment, material application, aggregate size and look, color selection

and shine level.







3. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with work.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other

construction activities.


A. Design Requirements

1. Hardened Concrete Properties

a. Minimal concrete compressive strength: 3500 psi.

b. Normal weight concrete, no light weight aggregates.

c. Non-air entrained concrete.

2. Placement Properties for New Concrete

a. Natural concrete slump of 4 ½ inches-5 inches, admixtures may be used.

b. Flatness Requirement

1) Overall FF 50.

2) Local FF 35.

3. Hard-Steel Troweled (3 passes) Concrete

a. No burn marks. Finish to ACI 302.1 R, Class 5 floor.

4. Curing Options

a. Membrane forming curing compounds (ASTM <309, Type 1, Class B, all

resin, dissipating cure, acrylic curing and sealing compounds not allowed.

b. Sheet membrane (ASTM C171) Polyethylene film not recommended.

c. Damp curing: Seven day cure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Stained concrete CONC1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject with compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited

to the following:






a. Basis of Design Product: Advanced Floor Products, RetroPlate Systems, P.O.

Box 80533, Provo, UT 84605, 800-998-5664.

b. Green Umbrella Systems, Dry Shield, 20 Jet View, Rochester, NY 14624.

c. Paul M. Wolff Company, Shur-Seal, 460 N. Geneva Road, Linden, UT 84042.

2.2 STAIN AND/OR DYE (IF REQUIRED)

A. Reactive Stain: Acidic-based stain with wetting agents and high-grade, UV-stable metallic

salts that react with calcium hydroxide in cured concrete to produce permanent, variegated,

or translucent color effects.

B. Penetrating Dye: Solvent based or water based, acrylic latex, penetrating stain with

colorfast pigments.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Retroplate Helix Dyes by Advanced Floor Products,

Retroplate Systems or equal: P.O. Box 80533, Provo, UT 84605, 800-998-5664.

2. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public

Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic


Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is

less.

2.3 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Liquid Densifier for Polished Concrete: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or

siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is

suitable for polished concrete surfaces.



to the following:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Retroplate 99 by Advanced Floor Products,

Retroplate Systems or equal: P.O. Box 80533, Provo, UT 84605, 800-998-

5664.



2.4 JOINT FILLER

A. Semi-rigid, 2 component, self-leveling, 100% solids rapid curing, polyuria control joint and

crack filler with a choice of 65, 75 or 85 shore-A hardness.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5205&mf=04&src=wd


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11249








to the following:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Retroplate 99 by Advanced Floor Products,

Retroplate Systems or equal: P.O. Box 80533, Provo, UT 84605, 800-998-

5664.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POLISHING

A. Polish Levels and Classes:

1. Aggregate Exposure CPAA Class C or D (if required to get past oil) medium to

heavy aggregate 1/4" to 1/2" exposed aggregate. Remove not more than 1/8 inch to

¼” of concrete surface by grinding and polishing resulting in majority of exposure

displaying medium to heavy aggregate.

a. Aggregate Exposure Class C – Medium Aggregate: Remove not more than

1/8” of concrete surface by grinding and polishing resulting in majority of

exposure displaying medium aggregate with no, or small amount of, large

aggregate at random locations.

b. Aggregate Exposure Class D – Large Aggregate: Remove not more than ¼”

of concrete surface by grinding and polishing resulting in majority of exposure

displaying large aggregate with no or small amount of, fine aggregate at

random locations.

2. Glossy Finish CPAA Level 2 – Satin (Honed):

a. Minimum flatness tolerance of 40 for “salt and pepper” finish.

b. Procedure: Not less than 5 step process with full refinement of each bonded

abrasive up to 800 grit bonded abrasive with one application of densifier.

c. Gloss reading: Not less than 55 according to ASTM D 4039 before stain guard

application or application of any other sealers.

B. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted

mockup.

1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth and to

depth required to reveal aggregate to match approved mockup.

2. Apply reactive stains, or penetrating dyes for polished concrete in polishing sequence

and according to manufacturer's written instructions but after initial grind and before

application of silicate densifier.







3. If using acid stain, neutralize floor before application of densifier (prevent

efflorescence).

4. Apply silicate densifier for polished concrete in polishing sequence at 200 sq. ft. per

gallon (without exception) and according to manufacturer’s written instructions

allowing recommended drying time between successive coats. Continue polishing

with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match

approved mock-up.

5. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing

operations.

6. Clean polished floor surfaces.

3.2 STAINING AND/OR DYING (IF REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE DESIRED COLOR)

A. Newly placed concrete shall be at least 28 days old before staining.

B. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Clean concrete thoroughly by scraping, applying solvents or stripping agents,

sweeping and pressure washing, or scrubbing with a rotary floor machine and

detergents recommended by stain manufacturer. Rinse until water is clear and allow

surface to dry.

a. Do not use acidic solutions to clean surfaces.

2. Test surfaces with droplets of water. If water beads and does not penetrate surface, or

penetrates only in some areas, profile surfaces by acid etching, grinding, sanding, or

abrasive blasting. Retest and continue profiling surface until water droplets

immediately darken and uniformly penetrate concrete surfaces.

3. Apply acidic solution to dampened concrete surfaces, scrubbing with uncolored,

acid-resistant nylon-bristle brushes until bubbling stops and concrete surface has

texture of 120-grit sandpaper. Do not allow solution to dry on concrete surfaces.

Rinse until water is clear. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

4. Neutralize concrete surfaces and rinse until water is clear. Test surface for residue

with clean white cloth. Test surface according to ASTM F 710 to ensure pH is

between 7 and 8.

C. Allow concrete surface to dry before applying stain. Verify readiness of concrete to receive

stain according to ASTM D 4263 by tightly taping 18-by-18-inch, 4-mil-thick polyethylene

sheet to a representative area of concrete surface. Apply stain only if no evidence of

moisture has accumulated under sheet after 16 hours.

D. Reactive Stain: Apply reactive stain to concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's

written instructions and as follows:

1. Apply stain by uncolored bristle brush, roller, or high-volume, low-pressure sprayer

and immediately scrub into concrete surface with uncolored, acid-resistant nylon-

bristle brushes in continuous, circular motion. Do not spread stain after fizzing stops.






Allow to dry four hours and repeat application of stain in sufficient quantity to obtain

color consistent with approved mockup.

2. Remove stain residue after four hours by wet scrubbing with commercial-grade

detergent recommended by stain manufacturer. Rinse until water is clear. Control,

collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

E. Penetrating Dye: Apply penetrating stain to concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's

written instructions and as follows:

1. Apply first coat of stain to dry, clean surfaces by airless sprayer or by high-volume,

low-pressure sprayer.

2. Allow to dry four hours and repeat application of stain in sufficient quantity to obtain

color consistent with approved mockup.

3. Rinse until water is clear. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

F. Topical Stain-Repellent Sealer (Penetrating Sealer):

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Retroplate, Advanced Flooring Products, Retropel, or

Equal.






CLEANING & REPAIR OF EXISTING MASONRY 040121 - 1

SECTION 040121 - CLEANING AND REPAIR OF EXISTING MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 of these

specifications govern all work hereunder.

B. Provide cleaning of all original exposed exterior masonry surfaces over the entire existing

building.

C. Provide cutting out and tuck pointing of all deteriorated or missing mortar joints in exterior

brick and stone masonry.

D. Provide repairs to or replacement of missing or deteriorated stone and brick and provide

repairs to structural cracks in stone and brick.

E. Work shall include all exterior stone and brick in exterior surfaces of existing building.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Brick and Block Masonry: Section 042000.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete specifications and other manufacturer’s data for each type of cleaner and

other chemicals proposed to be used.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Cleaning of masonry shall be performed by a firm which specializes in the cleaning and repair

of historic masonry.

B. Samples must be provided and approved by the Architect before work is performed.

C. Prior to commencing cleaning operation, complete a four foot square section of an existing

wall as directed by Architect. Maximum pressure of any high pressure water cleaning

apparatus used shall be adjusted so that the maximum pressure used will not damage existing

brick or stone masonry in any way. Show joints, mortar color, cleaned appearance, etc. Work






shall not proceed until sample panel has been approved. Sample approved by Architect shall

serve as a standard for the project.

D. Surfaces of masonry not being worked on shall be protected at all times during construction.

E. Masonry shall not be set when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90

degrees F.

F. Protect masonry against freezing for at least 48 hours after installation.

G. Do not use frozen materials.

H. No admixtures of any type will be allowed in the mortar mix.

I. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the

methods for proper performance of the work of this section.

1.5 SAMPLES

A. Prior to commencing a cleaning operation, Contractor shall completely clean a 25-foot square

sample panel using the methods, materials and working pressures proposed.

B. Work shall not proceed until sample panel has been approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaner shall be chemical liquid such as HT-626 Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra Cotta

Cleaner as manufactured by Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc., Hartford, CT 06145, (800)

278-7681, or equal approved by Architect.

1. If required, a pre-cleaning solution shall be used such as HT-704 as manufactured by

Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc., or equal approved by Architect.

B. Cleaner and pre-cleaner shall not contain any ingredients which will stain the brick, limestone

or other masonry materials.

C. Cleaner and pre-cleaner shall not destroy or damage the brick or stone facing.

D. Cleaner and pre-cleaner shall not be injurious to glass, paint, aluminum or plants.

E. Cleaner and pre-cleaner shall be completely biodegradable.

F. Water to be used shall be tested for mineral content and pH.






1. Hard water (high mineral content) may cause brick and stone masonry to discolor and

shall not be used.

2. Incoming water should be treated such that water applied to building will have a neutral

pH (pH7).

G. Mortar shall be mixed in the following proportions: 1 part lime, 1/5 part white Portland

cement, and 2-1/2 parts sand.

1. Mortar shall contain Ironite additive as specified hereafter.

2. Mortar in contact with earth shall be type S; all other mortar may be type N; all per

ASTM C270, latest edition.

H. Masonry cement shall meet requirements of ASTM C91, latest edition, regarding Type II

material. Bags shall bear manufacturer’s name and data proving conformance to this

specification.

I. Masonry Mortar shall meet requirements of ASTM C1329, latest edition. Bags shall bear

manufacturer’s name and data proving conformance to this specification.

J. Sand shall be fine, clean, white silica sand, free from deleterious materials and shall conform

to requirements of ASTM C144, latest edition.

K. All cements and mortar shall be fresh and undamaged from improper handling. Materials

shall be properly stored in a dry area at the site, with floor raised off the ground.

L. Water shall be clean enough to drink, and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or

organic materials.

M. Mortar coloring shall be added to the repointing mortar mix to make the new mortar

approximately two shades darker than the original; thus when new mortar bleaches out after

about one year it shall match the original.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Strictly adhere to manufacturer’s recommendations directing the cleaning process and use of

the cleaner.

B. Prior to commencing a soaking operation, the entire exterior of the building shall be inspected

for areas where leaking could occur. All such areas shall be sealed per Section 07 92 00 of

these specifications, or shall be repointed prior to soaking and cleaning.

C. General procedure shall be to commence operations at the bottom of the building. As the

scaffold proceeds upward from bottom, workmen shall pre-rinse or pre-clean as required.






When scaffold reaches top of building workmen shall thus proceed with the cleaning and high

pressure water rinsing procedure as the scaffold descends. It is most important, where a pre-

cleaning solution was used, to rinse thoroughly with high pressure water prior to application

of cleaner. High pressure water application shall be adjusted carefully to avoid damage to

existing brick and mortar.

D. Each process shall begin at a natural break and proceed up or down the building to the next

natural break, in a uniform and consistent manner.

1. When certain stone elements are to be water soaked, equipment shall be arranged to

reach all parts simultaneously.

2. Resetting equipment to reach other parts of the same stone element shall be avoided.

3. The water soaking process in each instance shall begin at the upper most reaches of a

particular segment of the building. When soaking is completed the equipment shall be

lowered in a straight line to the lowest point requiring treatment.

E. Remove all mortar and debris from damaged or eroding masonry joints.

1. Mortar shall be removed to 100% of deterioration or a minimum of 1 inch.

2. Removal of existing damaged mortar shall be achieved by the use of joint rakers, cold

chisels and hammers only. Electric and/or pneumatic tools may be used only if

approved.

3. Care shall be taken not to damage the faces, edges or corners of the masonry.

4. Mortar joints in which mortar is loose, missing, eroded, powdered, broken, hollow or

otherwise unsound or deteriorated shall be judged defective.

5. Mortar joints with fine hairline and/or shrinkage cracks that are otherwise sound, full

and solid shall not be judged defective.

F. Old defective mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned from the joints and the mortar left in place

must have a clean, square cut surface - not a “Vee” cut.

G. After having been cut, all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned by brushing and washing with

water in order to remove all traces of loose material and dust.

3.2 RESTORATION

A. Thoroughly mix all materials; exercise care in adding final water to mix to avoid overwetting.

B. Mortar may be retempered on the boards with water per ASTM C270 as long as it has not

started to set.

1. Do not retemper mortar on the boards if “initial set” has been reached.

2. All mortar not used within two (2) hours of mixing shall be discarded.

C. Retempering of mortar in the mixing box will not be permitted.

D. Wet joints thoroughly prior to repointing.






E. Brick and stone mortar joints shall be tuck pointed by compacting joint with non-shrinking

mortar. Press and bed mortar into joint leaving no pockets.

1. Joints shall be brought flush and tooled with a flat tool.

2. Tool mortar joints to match existing adjacent mortar joints.

3. Joints finished other than as approved shall be corrected as necessary by re-raking,

repointing and retooling.

F. Brick mortar joints shall be packed solid with necessary pressure and required tools.

1. Remove excess mortar from joint.

2. Tool joint as required to match existing adjacent mortar joints

G. Coordinate repointing of existing brick mortar joints with requirements for quantities as

indicated in Section 012100. A total of one thousand 1,000 square feet of mortar joint

repointing is included in the Base Bid. The Contract price will be adjusted upward or

downward by Change Order as required for more or less repointing required by existing

conditions of joints based on the price per linear foot inserted on the Proposal Form.

3.3 STRUCTURAL CRACK REPAIR

A. Mortar mix shall be same as specified for tuck pointing with the addition of Ironite at a rate

of seven percent (7%) by volume.

B. Preparation of and filling of cracks shall be same procedure as for preparation of masonry

joints specified above.

C. Mortar shall be compacted in crack to the entire depth.

D. Mortar shall be struck flush with stone surface; do not tuck point and tool to match existing

mortar joints, since crack was originally not a joint.

3.4 PRE-RINSE

A. Pre-rinse stone and masonry with high pressure water (1500 psi-5 gpm). Pressure shall be

reduced as required to avoid damage to existing masonry.

1. If recommended by manufacturer pre-cleaning may be required prior to the cleaning

process.

2. Pre-cleaning can replace pre-rinse process.

3. If required, reduce water pressure to protect masonry. If desired, product can be

applied by brush, spray or roller.






3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleaning process shall follow using Limestone Cleaner as directed by manufacturer using

spray, brush or rollers. If a pre-cleaner was used, masonry should be thoroughly rinsed prior

to application of cleaner.

3.6 RINSING

A. Following the cleaning process the masonry shall again be thoroughly rinsed.

1. Cleaning and rinsing processes ensure that pre-cleaner has been neutralized.

3.7 SAFETY

A. Use of rubber gloves and safety glasses by workers shall be mandatory.

B. Precautions shall be taken so that product shall not be sprayed on vehicles or persons on or

near the work site.

C. Manifold, nozzles, hoses, etc. shall be securely fastened to the scaffolding.

D. Troughs shall be erected to direct the water away from the building and vegetation.

E. Avoid spraying product on nearby trees, grass and shrubs.

1. If product is inadvertently sprayed on bushes, trees, lawns or plants it should be rinsed

off immediately to prevent permanent damage.

F. Avoid spraying pre-cleaner, if used, on aluminum trim, and painted surfaces.

1. Adequately protect these surfaces from spray to prevent damage.

G. During the course of all water soaking operations, one worker of supervisory caliber shall

personally view and inspect all interior areas of the building to guard against water

penetration.

3.8 CLEAN UP

A. All surplus mortar, spatter, drippings, etc. shall be removed from all surfaces immediately.

B. Final clean all work with water and fiber brushes, using no acids, at the completion of the

work. Rinse thoroughly after clean-up operations.






UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Building (common) brick.

3. Mortar and grout.

4. Steel reinforcing bars.

5. Masonry-joint reinforcement.

6. Ties and anchors.

7. Embedded flashing.

8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

9. Masonry-cell fill.

10. Architectural precast concrete caps for masonry walls

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in unit masonry.

2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.

3. Cavity wall insulation.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of

adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.

2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation.

3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing

and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.









1. Product Certificates for IgCC Section 503.2: Products within 500 miles of project

site, documentation indicating manufacturing locations. Include statement indicating

costs for each product manufactured within 500 miles of project site.

C. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry

reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.

2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special

applications.

3. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

2. Mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.

3. Weep holes and cavity vents.

4. Accessories embedded in masonry.

5. Cementitious materials


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls

within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to

ASTM C 67.

d. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area

compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

5. Reinforcing bars.






6. Joint reinforcement.

7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions

of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.

Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for

water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply

with compressive strength requirement.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and

equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and

to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long

by 48 inches high.

2. Build sample panels facing south.

3. Where masonry is to match existing, build panels adjacent and parallel to existing

surface.

4. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.

5. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

6. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;

aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect specifically

approves such deviations in writing.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 96 inches long by 72

inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup.






b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of

exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with

a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of

flashing).

2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing

surface.

3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and

aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically

approves such deviations in writing.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If

units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry

mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered

weatherproof dispensing silos.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of

dirt and oil.

D. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit

unloading units temporarily on the ground or other rehandling.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover

securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other

wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed

wythe, and hold cover in place.






B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at

least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with

such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted

and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with

ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged

by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements

contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is

40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than

seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained

in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture

and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from

single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.






B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units

to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where

such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly

designs indicated.

1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled

by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Indigenous Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project

site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well

as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If materials are transported by

rail or water, the distance transported by rail or water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to

determine the distance to Project site.

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed

faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2800 psi.

2. Density Classification: Lightweight.

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:

a. Nominal 4" x 8" x 16"

b. Nominal 6" x 8" x 16"

c. Nominal 8" x 8" x 16"

d. Nominal 12" x 8"x 16"

2.4 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam

CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with

reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before

handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.







2.5 BRICK

A. Indigenous Materials: Brick shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project

site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If materials are transported by rail

or water, the distance transported by rail or water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to determine

the distance to Project site.

B. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish

and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed

surfaces finished.

C. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Grade: SW.

2. Type: FBS.

3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according

to ASTM C 67.

4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is

rated "not effloresced."

5. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches

long.

6. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated.

7. Provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent

brickwork.

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Indigenous Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be

manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been

extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of

Project site. If materials are transported by rail or water, the distance transported by rail or

water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to determine the distance to Project site.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type M or S.

C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

D. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from masonry cement and mortar

pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Colored Masonry Cement:








a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.

2) Essroc.

3) Holcim (US) Inc.

4) Lafarge North America Inc.

5) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.

2. Formulate blend as required to match existing colors.

3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand

or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the

No. 16 sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to

produce required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying

with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry

mortar of composition indicated.

H. Water: Potable.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,

Grade 60.

B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.

5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.

6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457046221










C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of

side rods.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each

face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye

connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical

adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe

but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a

5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial

Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a

wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from 0.060-inch-

thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long

may be used for masonry constructed from solid units.

2. Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye

connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches.

3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow

vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to

plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip

galvanized steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.25-inch-diameter, hot-dip

galvanized steel wire.






F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches

long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Helical Repair Anchors: Type 304 stainless-steel spiral rods; intended for anchoring brick

veneers to backup masonry.

1. Use one of the following or approved equal:

a. 8 mm #391 Remedial Wall Ties supplied by Heckmann Building Products,

Inc.

b. 8 mm DryFix Ties supplied by Helifix Inc.

c. 8 mm Spira-Loks supplied by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. EMBEDDED

2.9 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz. /sq. ft. weight

or 0.0216 inch thick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz.

/sq. ft. weight or 0.0162 inch thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not

exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the

followings:

1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing

2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-way interlocking

thruwall flashing.

3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically keyed flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where

indicated to receive counterflashing.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by

extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and

hemmed.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 5-oz. /sq. ft. copper sheet coated with flexible

asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:






1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Cop-R-Cote.

2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper coated thru-

wall flashing.

3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H&B C-coat Flashing

4) Phoenix Building Products; Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated.

5) Sandell Manufacturing Co. Inc.; Coated Copper Flashing.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal

flashing.

3. Where flashing is fully concealed, and used with masonry back-up, use asphalt

coated copper flashing.

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain

watertight.

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard

products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to

each other and to substrates.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene

or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,

complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with

ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain

lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I

(No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height

and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color

selected from manufacturer's standard.








a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not


1) Mortar Net USA Ltd; Mortar Net Weep Vents.

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer’s standard-strength cleaner designed for

removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new

masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly

approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


to, the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem Inc.

c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3. For exterior masonry, use masonry cement mortar.

4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.

5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed

to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend

ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed

to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.








3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls;

for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other

applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with

other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement

products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Mix to match existing mortar.

3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following

units:

a. Clay face brick.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that

will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and

pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for

specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

2.13 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

A. Precast Molds

1. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free,

that provides continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication

tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required

finishes.

a. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced form-release agent that does not

bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not

impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

2. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated.

Use with manufacturer's recommended form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent

surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

B. Reinforcing Materials

1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

C. Concrete Materials






1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise

indicated.

a. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement,

of same type, brand, and mill source

2. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117,

ASTM C 33/C 33M, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine

and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or

quarry) for Project.

D. Steel Connection Materials

1. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or

ASTM A 706/A 706M.

E. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion full-depth mixture by either laboratory trial

batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on

Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

2.14 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions

detrimental to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.15 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full

thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of

widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.






C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,

sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is

specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing

masonry.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.

per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are

damp but not wet at time of laying.

2.16 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch

or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than

plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than

1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not

vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch

maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10

feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10

feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8

inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than

1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by

more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances

specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:






1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8

inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by

more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by

more than 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight

line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

2.17 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and

offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where

possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at

corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not

less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use

units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those

in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to

receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before

laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other

Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,

and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or

roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.






1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above.

2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."

2.18 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings

where cells are not grouted.

5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed

anchors and ties in mortar.

B. Lay solid masonry units and hollow brick with completely filled bed and head joints; butter

ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow

bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.19 COMPOSITE MASONRY

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:

1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement

extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)

reinforcement.

B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving

units of other wythe into place.

C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless


1. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement at corners by using

prefabricated L-shaped units as well as masonry bonding.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at

juncture, bond walls together as follows:






1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped

units.

3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow

masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.

2.20 MASONRY-CELL FILL

A. Pour lightweight-aggregate fill into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to

show presence of fill at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been

confirmed. Limit the fall of fill to one story high, but not more than 20 feet.

B. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.

2.21 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install reinforcing bars as indicated in the drawings.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

2.22 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural

steel or concrete, to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural

steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and

other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches

o.c. horizontally.

2.23 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry

progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to

allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.






C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than

3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

2.24 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-

size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other

supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

2.25 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,

ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install

cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities,

and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing

on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal

penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing

manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer

wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at

each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less

than 2 inches to form end dams.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown

to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry

immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.






E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for

cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

F. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified

weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.

Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

2.26 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.

Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and

curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on

them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained

enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for

grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

2.27 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and

inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as

needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with

specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-

prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of

grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.






C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according

to ASTM C 780.

F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.

2.28 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;

install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,

where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as

follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before

proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by

covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and

waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical

Notes 20.

6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-

4A.

7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions.






2.29 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's

property.







STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Grout.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in

AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other

construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates,

instructions, and directions for installation.





B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts

and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.

3. Include embedment Drawings.






051200 - 2

4. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

5. Include embedment Drawings.

6. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be

removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

7. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):

Provide according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint

whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Shear stud connectors.

3. Shop primers.

4. Nonshrink grout.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

1. Exception: The fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control

procedures which provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and the

fabricator’s ability to conform to approved drawings, project specifications and

referenced standards.

a. At the Contractor’s expense, an Independent Testing Agency acceptable to

Architect shall review the procedures to the completeness and adequacy

relative to the Code requirements for the fabricators scope of work.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."






051200 - 3

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical

welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by

AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for

welding personnel qualification.

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.

3. AISC 360.

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members

off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage,

or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged

materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency

observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract

Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads

indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using AISC 360.

2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level.

B. Construction: Shear wall system.






051200 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992.

B. Channels, Angles-: ASTM A 36.

C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325,Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural

bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1,

hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with

plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-

finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain.

C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.






051200 - 5

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to

AISC 360.

1. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting

shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular

to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-

SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work

to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt

holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular

to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other

work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.






051200 - 6

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1and AWS D1.8 for tolerances, appearances,

welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding

work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

4. Galvanized surfaces.

5. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and

standards:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film

thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,

edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel

according to ASTM A 123.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.


A. Special Inspections and tests will be performed by the Special Inspector or Special

Inspection Agency.






051200 - 7

1. Provide access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced

to perform tests and inspections.

2. Verify that the fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control

procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and that

those procedures are being implemented. This inspection will provide a basis for

determination of the fabricator’s ability to conform to approved drawings, project

specifications, and referenced standards.

a. Exception: Special Inspections will not be required where the work is done

on the premises of a fabricator registered and approved to perform such work

without special inspection.

3. Approval shall be based upon review of the fabricator’s written procedural and

quality control manuals and periodic auditing of fabrication practices.

4. At completion of fabrication, the fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance

stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction

documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing

surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance

with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor

rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles,

and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep

structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and

loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent

structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to

AISC 303 and AISC 360.






051200 - 8

B. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-

reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of

plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge

of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are

in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally

cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that

must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.






051200 - 9

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for tolerances, appearances,

welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding

work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of

temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections and tests will be performed by the Special Inspector or Special

Inspection Agency.

B. Verification and inspection of steel construction shall be in accordance with the

requirements of Section 1705.2 of Virginia Construction Code 2012 and as follows:

1. Welding: Welding inspection shall be in compliance with AWSD1.1. In addition to

visual inspection, welds may be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the

following inspection procedures, at Special Inspector’s option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be

accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

2. Details: Perform an inspection of the steel frame to verify compliance with the

details shown on the approved construction documents such as bracing, stiffening,

member locations and proper application of joint details at each connection.

3. High Strength Bolts: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to

RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

a. General: While Work is in progress, determine that the requirements for bolts,

nuts, washers, paint, bolted parts and installation and tightening in such

standards are met. For joints required to be tightened only to snug-tight

condition, verify that the connected materials have been drawn together and

properly snugged.

b. Periodic monitoring: Joints designated as sung tight need be inspected only on

a periodic basis.

4. Shear Studs: Test and inspect welded shear connectors according to requirements in

AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:






051200 - 10

C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with

the Contract Documents.

D. Additional testing performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified

requirements shall be at Contractor’s expense.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is

damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply

with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-

tool cleaning.






STEEL DECKING

053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,

pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other

construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."





STEEL DECKING

053100 - 2


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,

and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel

Structural Members."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF DECK

A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI

Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with

the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc

coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated.

3. Profile Depth: As indicated.

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.

5. Span Condition: As indicated.

6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.

B. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of

33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish

as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.





STEEL DECKING

053100 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary

in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this

Section.

B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately

aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch

or contract side-lap interlocks.

D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to deck.

F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work.

G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the

surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-

1/2 incheslong, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels

between supports, at intervals indicated, and as follows:





STEEL DECKING

053100 - 4

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

incheswith end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end

closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.


A. Special Inspections and tests shall be performed by the Special Inspector or Special

Inspection Agency.

B. Verification and inspection of metal deck construction shall be in accordance with Table

1705.2.2 of Virginia Construction Code 2012, and as follows:

1. Welding: Welding inspection shall be in compliance with AWSD1.3.

2. Details: Perform an inspection of the steel decking to verify compliance with the

details shown on the approved construction documents, such as layout, bearing and

laps, quantity and spacing of welds and screws.

C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance

of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of

deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.






METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.

3. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

4. Shelf angles.

5. Metal ladders.

6. Miscellaneous steel trim including loading-dock edge angles.

7. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in

other Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are

not specified in other Sections.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe

sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into

concrete.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other

items built into unit masonry.

3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

4. Section 129300 "Site Furnishings" for bicycle racks.






1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with

paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and

topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including

sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be

embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

2. Paint products.

3. Grout.


1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer

recycled content and cost.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,

sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and

accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.

3. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not

specified in other Sections.

5. Shelf angles.

6. Metal ladders.

7. Miscellaneous steel trim including loading-dock edge angles.

8. Loose steel lintels.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.







B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous

with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.

B. Structural Performance of Ladders: Ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses

within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.






2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior

use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy

[Group 1] [Group 2].

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;

and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times

the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when

installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M,

conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip

galvanized per ASTM F 2329.







G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

B. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for

normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of

3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated

installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a

radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas

on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners

or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.






G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,

screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space

anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated

loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with

integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch

embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24

inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive

adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes

recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces

as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to

receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop

Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete

framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6

inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.

2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.






B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry

and concrete.

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-

in-place concrete.

2.8 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.

3. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars.

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material

metallically bonded to rung.

6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 48 inches o.c. with welded

or bolted steel brackets.

7. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets.

8. Prime interiors ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles

shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use

concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation

with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or

masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.






B. Galvanize plates.

2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths

for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a

single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear

span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported

from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no

fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M

for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron

products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean

railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate

process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be

embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" unless zinc-

rich primer is indicated.






D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated

below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning."

3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application

Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;

with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established

lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that

are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size

limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip

galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of

adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners

for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood

screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into

concrete, masonry, or similar construction.






F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being

supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on

Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members

have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims

but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink

grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids

remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.






ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

3. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches

nominal size in least dimension.

B. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

C. OSB: Oriented strand board.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer

and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified

independent testing agency.






3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both

before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified

independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture

content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to

Project site.


Product Certificates: For indigenous materials, indicating location of material manufacturer

and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance

to Project, means of transportation, and cost for each indigenous material.

2. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of

costs.


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air

circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,

securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Indigenous Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800

km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well

as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If materials are transported by

rail or water, the distance transported by rail or water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to

determine the distance to Project site.

1. Dimension lumber, except treated materials.

2. Laminated-veneer lumber.

3. Parallel-strand lumber.

4. Prefabricated wood I-joists.

5. Rim boards.

Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be labeled according to the AF&PA's

Sustainable Forestry Initiative, be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001

and FSC STD-40-004, or be certified and labeled according to the standards of the

Programme for Endorsement of Forest Certification.

1. Dimension lumber, except treated materials.

2. Laminated-veneer lumber.

3. Parallel-strand lumber.










4. Prefabricated wood I-joists.

5. Rim boards.

C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified

by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of

Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in

contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing

no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC

Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in

contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior

masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces

or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of

other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.






2. Nailers.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

4. Cants.

5. Furring.

6. Grounds.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber or any of the following

species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB.

3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.

5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

6. Northern species; NLGA.

7. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade

lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects

that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness

indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements

specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-

preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-

dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.






D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking,

grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Provide Fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities.






SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing.

2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall

sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer

and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.

Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.

Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both

before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified

independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content

of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.



costs.







2. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with

requirements for formaldehyde emissions.

3. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.

4. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with

requirements for low-emitting materials.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification

marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.

Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California



B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be labeled according to the AF&PA's

Sustainable Forestry Initiative, be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001

and FSC STD-40-004, or be certified and labeled according to the standards of the Program

for Endorsement of Forest Certification.

1. Plywood.

2. Oriented strand board.

3. Particleboard underlayment.

4. Hardboard underlayment.









C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness

indicated.

D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in

contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing

no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with

fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per

test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index

of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the

flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any

time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for

fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and

where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201/D 3201M at 92 percent relative humidity.

Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified

testing agency.






E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Roof sheathing.

2.4 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Exterior sheathing.

1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.

b. G-P Building Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond c(2)xP.

d. Temple-Inland Inc.; Green Glass.

e. United States Gypsum Company; Securock.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch or Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated.

3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements

specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying

with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing:

ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw

manufacturer for material being fastened.

E. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws,

in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with

ASTM C 1002.











2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with

ASTM C 954.

2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with

ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and

sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed

fasteners.

1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or

10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for

use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing

and with a history of successful in-service use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too

small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints

so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting

construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and

Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not

fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish

materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation

so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from

passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of

structural support elements.






G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is

forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered

Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at

edges of wall sheathing panels.

b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.

c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws.

2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.

3. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts

structural elements.

4. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that

might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up.

Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels

without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from

edges and ends of panels.

D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient

amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other

penetrations and openings.

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and

trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed

fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations

and openings.






PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED-ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-

faced architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.

3. Plastic-laminate – faced countertops.

4. Metal edge trim for plastic-laminate faced countertops.

5. Epoxy resin countertops.

6. Hardware.

7. Display case glazing and framing.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging

strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction

before cabinet installation.

2. Section 123553.16 “Laboratory Casework” for metal base cabinets with epoxy resin

countertops.

3. Section 096513 “Resilient Base and Accessories” for resilient base applied to plastic

laminate clad architectural cabinets.

4. Lighting for display case units.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other

related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and

fully loaded cabinets.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in

Section 087100 "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural cabinets; coordinate Shop

Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.








1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.




2. Product Certificates: For indigenous materials, indicating location of material

manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.

Include distance to Project, means of transportation, and cost for each indigenous

material.


costs.

4. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.



C. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Show large-scale details.

3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including

concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate

architectural cabinets.

5. Apply AWI Quality Certification and or WI Certified Compliance Program label to

Shop Drawings.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in

manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

F. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. (Base and Upper Cabinets) Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color,

pattern, and surface finish required.

a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material

applied to one edge.

2. (Countertop) Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and

surface finish required.











3. (Countertop) Epoxy Resin: 8 by 10 inches.

4. Cabinet Hardware, Edge trim and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and

finish.

5. Display Case glazing and frame components and hardware: 8 by 10 inches,

illustrating construction of glass and frame, showing interface with adjacent and

substrate and finishes.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products.

2. High-pressure decorative laminate.

3. Display case glazing.

4. Adhesives.

5. Epoxy Resin.

C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program and/or WI

Certified Compliance Program.

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

service performance.

1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant

and/or WI's Certified Compliance Program licensee.

B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant and/or

WI's Certified Compliance Program licensee.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage

architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in

installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements

specified in "Field Conditions" Article.







A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed,

wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and

relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the

construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction

progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by

field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish

dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established

dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI’s or WI’s quality

standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.

2. Medium – Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder

containing no area formaldehyde.

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde.

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

1. Provide PVC edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with

exposed or semi-exposed edges.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated,

as required by woodwork quality standard.






1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Abet Laminati, Inc.

b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.

c. Formica Corporation.

d. Lamin-Art, Inc.

e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.

f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated.

g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.

h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

i. Pionite Decorative Surfaces.

E. Display case glazing: Tempered, Low/no Glare

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by

Describing Products)."

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as

follows:

1. Semi-concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

1. Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.; Model No. DP129, satin stainless steel, or approved

equal.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests,

B04081.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel-

extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.






I. Self-latching Flush Bolt: Flush mounted locking device for the inactive leaf of a pair of

doors that latches automatically and unlatches manually.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic

grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug

Mockett & Company, Inc.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product

class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to

less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure

anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside

face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-

steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior

woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for

wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in

installation areas.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum

extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary

for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance

for scribing, trimming, and fitting.






1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication

will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be

removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check

measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings

before disassembling for shipment.

D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates

or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of

cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

C. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless.

D. WI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.

E. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.

F. Reveal Dimension: 1/4 inch.

G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying

with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.

2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.

3. Edges: PVC edge banding 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, color as indicated.

H. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick,

matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces,

provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber or Thermoset decorative panels.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood or Thermoset decorative panels.






I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure

decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and

textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Plastic laminates as indicated on Drawings.

2. PVC Edge banding color as selected from manufacturer’s full range including in

stock, special order and patterned selections to match plastic laminates.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and

textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on Drawings.

D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

E. Edge Treatment: As noted on drawings (varies per area).

1. PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, color as selected from manufacturer’s

full range including in stock, special order and patterned selections to match plastic

laminates.

2. Metal edge banding, anodized aluminum finish. Height flush with abutting PLAM

material on main vertical counter top face, hairline seams.

F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard.

G. Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue or exterior-

grade plywood.

2.7 EPOXY RESIN COUNTERTOPS ERT1

A. Epoxy Resin Top: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, non-

specular finish.








to the following:

a. Durcon Incorporated

b. Prime Industries, Inc.

c. Thermo Fisher Scientific, Inc.

d. Trespa, Basis-of-Design Product, TopLab.

2. Physical Properties:

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi.

b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi.

c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.

d. Water absorption (24 hrs): Not more than 0.02 percent.

e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.

3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested

with indicated reagents according to NEMA LLD3, Test procedure 3.4.5:

a. No effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28

percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate,

ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent) phenol,

sulfuric acid 160 percent), and toluene.

b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).

c. Color: Black

d. Warranty: 10-year product guarantee minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion

and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in

Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements

for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.






C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged

finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure

with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete

installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk

and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as

indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation

from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16

inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood

framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other

supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.

Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation

from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to

walls with adhesive.

4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail

holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and

visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.






C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.






BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1

SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bituminous vapor retarders.




1. Product Data for IgCC Section 806.2: For coatings, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for IgCC Section 806.2: For coatings, indicating compliance

with requirements for low-emitting materials.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source

from single manufacturer. Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer of primary materials.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having

jurisdiction unless otherwise required.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. APOC, Inc; a division of Gardner Industries.

2. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.

3. Brewer Company (The).

4. ChemMasters, Inc.

5. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.

6. Henry Company.

7. Karnak Corporation.

8. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

E. VOC Content: 30g/L, or less.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing

manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as

recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

D. Patching Compound: Asbestos-free fibered mastic of type recommended in writing by

dampproofing manufacturer.















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting

performance of bituminous dampproofing work.

1. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been

completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated

with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes

and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill

voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime

material manufacturer.

C. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other

imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time

between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are

indicated.

1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.

2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a

smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.

B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top

of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of

footing.

1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not

extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,

changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by

embedding an 8-inch-wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of






dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats

required.

C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap

dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other

items that penetrate inner wythe.

1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that

interrupt inner wythe.

2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal. /100 sq. ft.

for first coat and 1 gal. /100 sq. ft. for second coat.

B. Masonry Backup for Brick Veneer Assemblies: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at

not less than 1 gal. /100 sq. ft.

C. Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at

not less than 1 gal. /100 sq. ft.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.






THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass-fiber blanket.

2. Mineral-wool blanket.


1. Section 075113 "Built-up Asphalt Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing

construction.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic

insulation.






2. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.

3. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.

4. Laboratory Test Reports: For insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for



A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.










A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Insulation shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public

Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical

Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions

shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less, except for insulation

manufactured without formaldehyde.

B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

content not less than 25 percent.

C. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and

smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work, include, but are not limited

to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Guardian Building Products, Inc.

c. Johns Manville.

d. Knauf Insulation.

e. Owens Corning.

2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled


B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane

facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of

25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work, include, but are not limited

to, the following:
















a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Fibrex Insulations, Inc.

c. Owens Corning.

d. Roxul Inc.

e. Thermafiber.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in

place.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.: Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Gemco: Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter;

length to suit depth of insulation.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting

spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-

locking washer in place.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Gemco: 90-Degree Insulation Hanger.

2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch-thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with

each leg 2 inches square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter;

length to suit depth of insulation.

C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely

to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.

b. Gemco.
















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing

projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with

insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to

ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and

fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,

widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are

otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the

following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce

a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit

between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for

or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support

unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of

insulation to flanges of metal studs.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,

and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to

abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.






WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wrap.



1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing

according to referenced standards.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of building wrap at terminations, openings, and penetrations.

Show details of flexible flashing applications.


A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV

stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to the following:






WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2

a. Vapro Sheild: “Wrap Shield SA” or equal.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 20 perms per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant

Method (Procedure A).

3. Air Leakage: Not more than 2.0 CFM/ft2 when tested at a pressure of 33.35 psf in

accordance with ASTM E2357.

4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.

B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to

framing immediately after sheathing is installed.

B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at

expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless


C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty

requirements.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.

2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.







FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07421313 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 074213.23 "Metal Composite Material Wall Panels" for metal-faced

composite wall panels.

2. Section 074293 "Soffit Panels" for metal panels used in horizontal soffit applications.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.


1. Product Certificates for IgCC Section 503.2: For products having recycled content,

documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer

recycled content and cost. Include statement indicating cost for each product having

recycled content.

2. Product Certificates for IgCC Section 503.2: For products manufactured within 500

miles of project site, documentation indicating manufacturing locations. Include

statement indicating costs for each product manufactured within 500 miles of project

site.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,

flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.






2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of

not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied

finishes.

1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size

indicated below:

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by 12" width. Include fasteners, closures, and other

metal panel accessories.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained

and approved by manufacturer.

B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming

equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as

factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for

duration of work.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and

surface damage.






C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight

and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for

drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause

staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'

written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of

soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of

the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to

ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to



D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on

surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, PROFILE METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed exposed fastener metal panels with interconnecting side

joints designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and

mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include

accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. MP-1: Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal

ribs.

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Style

Rib” profile by Centria Architectural Systems or comparable product that has similar

profile from the following:

a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA).

b. ATAS International, Inc.

c. Berridge Manufacturing Company.

d. Englert, Inc.






e. Fabral.

f. Firestone Building Products.

g. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.

h. Industrial Building Panels, Inc.

i. MBCI; a division of NCI Group, Inc.

j. McElroy Metal, Inc.

k. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.

l. Morin - A Kingspan Group Company.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel

sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;

structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 22 Gauge.

b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

d. Panel Coverage: 36 inches

e. Panel Height: 1.5 inches

C. MP-2: Rib Profile, Exposed Exposed Fastener perforated metal wall panel: formed with

raised, trapezoidal ribs.

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

“EcoScreen Perforated Screen Wall Style Rib” by Centria Architectural Systems or

comparable product that has similar profile to the following:




d. Englert, Inc.

e. Fabral.








2. Metallic-Coated Sheet Steel: Zinc-Coated (galvanized) sheet steel complying with

ASTM A 653/A653M, 690 coting designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel

sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 Coating designation;

structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A

755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: .040".







c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

3. Panel Pattern:

a. Pattern and Perforation: Staggered pattern, 3/8" inch perforations at 9/16 in

spacing, with 40% open area.

D. MP-3: Rib Profile, Exposed Exposed Fastener perforated metal wall panel: formed with

raised, trapezoidal ribs.

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

“EcoScreen Perforated Screen Wall Style Rib” by Centria Architectural Systems or

comparable product that has similar profile to the following:




d. Englert, Inc.

e. Fabral.








2. Metallic-Coated Sheet Steel: Zinc-Coated (galvanized) sheet steel complying with

ASTM A 653/A653M, 690 coting designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel

sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 Coating designation;

structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A

755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: .040".


c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

3. Panel Pattern:

a. Pattern and Perforation: Reverse, 1/8 inch perforations at 1/2 inch spacing,

with 23% open area.







A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated

steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,

Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide

manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel

system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system

including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,

gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal

panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-

foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure

strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as

required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but

are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes,

fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish

system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed

fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-

applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible

with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,

nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain

weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.






2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's

standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance

requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with

dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise

from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed

edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams

and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with

flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate

sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are

not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being

anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal

panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of

metal being secured.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable

variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components

are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or

installed to minimize contrast.






C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural

panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment

tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall

panel manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or

backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support

members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written

recommendations.






3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,

sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise

indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with

provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping

screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings

that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.

6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel

splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping

screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-

tapping screws.

8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use

galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint

at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line

for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather

side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without

rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to

compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install

screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

E. Watertight Installation:






1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels,

using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type

panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and

accessories.

3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with

flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim,

copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and

similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not

indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide

concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install

work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is

true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof

performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24

inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used

or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing

hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within

joints).


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections.

B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for water

penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not

comply with specified requirements.






E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine


F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal

panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,

and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair

by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07421323 - 1

SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite material

panel Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative,

structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal

composite material panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel

installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment

between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of

other construction that affect metal composite material panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests

and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel

assembly during and after installation.

8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.

9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and

furnish copy of record to each participant.










B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels;

details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment

assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less

than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated

with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of

size indicated below.

1. Metal Composite Material Panels: 6" x 6". Include fasteners, closures, and other

metal composite material panel accessories.

2. Trim and Closures: 8" long, include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

E. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved.

1. Wall panels and attachments.

2. Girts and Stud Framing.

3. Penetrations of walls by pipes and utilities.

4. Wall mounted items including windows and light fixtures.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.









B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly as shown on

Drawings, including soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories at existing precast

fascia.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such

deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as

not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection

during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending,

warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with

suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to

ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite

material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other

surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during

installation.



conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according

to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify measurements of existing fascia and wall opening dimensions

before metal composite wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements on shop

drawings.






1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing,

trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and

noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY


replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.






agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of

deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.



ASTM D 2244.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of

withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:



B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to








C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to




changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on

surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled,

metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a

solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated.

Include attachment assembly components, and accessories required for weathertight system.



to the following:

a. Alcan Composites USA Inc.; Alucobond

b. Alpolic Composites of Mitsubishi Chemical America Inc., Alpolic.

c. Centria Architectural Systems; Formabond wall system.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated

aluminum sheet facings.

1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch.

2. Core: Standard.

3. Exterior Finish: Mica fluoropolymer.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including all

colors in silver range.

C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.

D. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard.



steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,










manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite

material panel system.


including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,

gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal

composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal

composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished

appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners,

endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish

flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.


fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic

caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed

fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and

remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel

manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the

factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill

indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with

indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or

separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that

minimize noise from movements.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's















4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate






panel manufacturer.


metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of


2.5 FINISHES








C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:

1. Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended

mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating

and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural


tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal

composite material wall panel manufacturer.






a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or


B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material

panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal

composite material panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION


members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel

manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written

instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels

perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material

panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and

structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.

2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten

with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive

barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are

installed.



5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.

6. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts,

or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar

elements with self-tapping screws.


B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to

the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the

interior.


protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material

panel manufacturer.






D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal

composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system,

including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor

channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings,

and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements

specified.

1. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal

composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.

F. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners

recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel

clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.

1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall

panels with manufacturer's standard gaskets.

G. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and



1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly

including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,

closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material

panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by

metal composite material panel manufacturer.

H. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written




1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is


Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof

performance.




or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing

hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within

joints).






3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within

installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location

lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of

matching profiles.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field tests and

inspections.

B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for water

penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test

and inspections.

E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine


F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite

material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written

installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation,

clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of

obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated

beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






SOFFIT PANELS 074293 - 1

SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal soffit panels.


1. Section 074213.13 "Formed Metal Wall Panels" for lap-seam metal wall panels.








C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,

flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of

not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied

color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of

size indicated below:







1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and

other metal panel accessories.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.




B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming

equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as

factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for

duration of work.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of composite metal wall panel and soffit at existing roof fascia

overhang including attachment and all accessories.




A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and

surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight

and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for

drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause

staining, denting, or other surface damage.






D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.



conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'

written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of

walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY


replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within







agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of




ASTM D 2244.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled


B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of

the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:



2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting

side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using

concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Perforated panels formed with vertical panel edges and

intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges; with flush joint

between panels.

1. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal wall panels.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel

sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;

structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch.

b. Exterior Finish: Mica fluoropolymer.


3. Panel Coverage: 24" ± - verify existing soffit dimensions.

4. Panel Height: 1.0 inch.



steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,


manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel

system.








including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-

foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure

strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as

required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and

trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.


fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-

applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible

with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,

nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain

weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's

standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance

requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with

dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels

may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are

of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels.

Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with

details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise

from movements.






E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's










4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate






panel manufacturer.


metal soffit panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of


2.5 FINISHES








C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended

mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating

and resin manufacturers' written instructions.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting


1. Examine framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural


tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer.

2. Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel

manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers been installed over sheathing or


B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION


members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written

recommendations.

1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,

sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise

indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with

provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping

screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings

that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.



5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.






6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel

splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.


B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use

galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to

the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the

interior.

3. Copper Panels: Use copper, stainless-steel, or hardware-bronze fasteners.

4. Stainless-Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners.


protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint

at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather

side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without

rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to

compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install

screws in predrilled holes.

E. Watertight Installation:

1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels,

using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type

panels and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and

accessories.

3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and



1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim,

corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar

items. Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated,

provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.






G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written




1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is


Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof

performance.




or would not be waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,

not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal

panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,

and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair

by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075113 - 1

SECTION 075113 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Built-up asphalt roofing.

2. Vapor retarder.

3. Roof insulation.

4. Skylight Units.

B. Section includes the installation of insulation strips in ribs of acoustical roof deck.

Insulation strips are furnished under Section 053100 "Steel Decking."


1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counterflashings.

2. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for proprietary manufactured

roof expansion-joint assemblies.

3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

4. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

5. Section 012200 “Unit Prices” for replacing deficient roof decking

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to Work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting

agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing manufacturer's representative, deck






Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including

installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including

manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,


delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,

including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



B. Design Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports for IgCC Section 404.3: For roof materials, documentation

indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.

2. Product Data for IgCC Section 806.2: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC

content.

3. Laboratory Test Reports for IgCC Section 806.2: For adhesives and sealants,

indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

C. Shop Drawings: For built-up roofing. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and built-up terminations

2. Attachment details for insulation to existing deck

3. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

4. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.

5. Skylight Units.

D. Samples for Verification: Provide (3) sets of the following products:

1. Roofing Insulation.

2. Sample Cover Board.

3. SBS base sheet modified roofing felt.

4. SBS granule surfaced modified cap sheet.

5. Coating sample of 2 ply system.

6. Mechanical fasteners and plate.








7. Walkway pads.

8. Skylight glazing.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that built-up roofing

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of built-up roofing, for tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of built-up roofing, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For built-up roofing to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for built-up roofing

identical to that specified in this section with a minimum of 15 years of experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by built-

up roofing manufacturer to install specified roofing system, has a minimum of 5 years

experience installing the specified products and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's

special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and

labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,

approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other

components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected

location and within the temperature range required by roofing manufacturer. Protect stored

liquid material from direct sunlight.






1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated

shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.



conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions

and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this article shall not deprive the owner of

other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and

shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the contractor

under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Roofing Manufacturer’s 25 year No Dollar Limit (NDL) System Warranty: Submit a

written warranty without monetary limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer

agreeing to promptly repair leaks in the roofing system resulting from defects in material or

workmanship to replace wet/damaged roof areas resulting from such leaks for the following

warranty period. Materials and installation of the materials included in guarantee are

insulation, coverboards, adhesives, roofing membranes, flashing membranes, and fasteners.

1. Warranty Period: Twenty five (25) years No Dollar Limit, minimum.

C. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of

this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all

components of built-up roofing such as built-up roofing membrane, base flashing, roof

insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and

walkway products, for the following warranty period:


D. Coating Manufacturers Material Warranty: Submit the coating manufacturer’s material

warranty covering the coating system to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of

10 years from date of completion. Manufacturer must agree to supply the Owner, at no

charge, sufficient material to repair or replace product proven defective.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work, include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. SBS Modified Roofing.

a. Johns Manville 2PID-CA (design standard).

b. Siplast

c. Equal approved in advance by Architect.

2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (as accepted by the membrane manufacturer for

systems warranty).

a. Johns Manville.

b. Atlas Roofing Corporation

c. Firestone.

d. Equal approved in advance by Architect.

3. Coverboard (as accepted by the membrane manufacturer for systems warranty).

a. USG Gypsum: Securock Gypfiber, 1/2" min.

b. Georgia Pacifi: Dens Deck Prime, 1/2" min.

c. CertainTeed; GlasRoc roof board, 1/2" min.


A. General Performance: Installed built-up roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified

uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due

to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Built-up

roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure

when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according

to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and

adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by

built-up roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the uplift pressures,

calculated according to ASCE/SEI7 and the local code with a safety factor of (2) two for










specific locations. Provide Commonwealth of Virginia registered engineer’s calculations

certifying manufacturer’s calculations.

D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 104 with 3 year aged not less than 93 when

calculated according to ASTM D 6083, based on testing identical products by a qualified

testing agency.

E. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof

Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

F. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance of not less than

0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

G. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof

slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate

markings of applicable testing agency.

H. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE SHEET MATERIALS

A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb. /100 sq. ft.

B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, Grade S, SBS-modified asphalt-impregnated and -

coated sheet 120 mils in thickness, with glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine

mineral surfacing on both sides.

1. Weight: 60 lb. /100 sq. ft., minimum.

C. Cap Sheet: Fire Rated, modified bitumen sheet, 165 mils in thickness, polyester mat

complying with ASTM D 3909, Type II, Grade G.

2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS

A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet,

dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides 120 mil in thickness.

B. Granule-Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164/D 6164, Grade G, Type II, polyester-

reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granule-surfaced base flashing; suitable for

application method specified, and as follows:

1. Granule Color: White.







2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.

B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by built-up roofing

manufacturer for application.

C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified.

2.6 AUXILIARY BUILT-UP ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and

compatible with built-up roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.

b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.

c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.

d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.

e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L.

f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.

g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.

h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.

i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.

j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

3. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and


Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m or

7 ppb, whichever is less.

B. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-part,

asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with

built-up base flashings.

C. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing

manufacturer for application.

D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; nonhardening, nonmigrating,

nonskinning, and nondrying.








E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with

corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening built-up roofing

components to existing cementious wood fiber substrate; tested by manufacturer for

required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer.

G. Applied Reflective Coating System: Install ASTM D 6083 white reflective acrylic

elastomeric coating. Energy Star labeled and CRRC listed. Apply base coat and top coat at

a minimum 1.75 gallons per square. The final top coat shall be installed perpendicular to

base coat.

2.7 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing

manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of

thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-

fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. R-value equal to 38.



to the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.

b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

c. Dyplast Products.

d. Firestone Building Products.

e. GAF Materials Corporation.

f. Hunter Panels.

g. Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company.

h. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

i. Rmax, Inc.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch

per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended

use and compatible with built-up roofing.
















B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with

corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to

existing cementitious wood fiber substrate and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.

D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.

E. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2

inch thick.

F. Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch-wide, coated, glass fiber.

2.9 WALKWAYS

A. Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip-resisting

pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing manufacturer,

1/2 inch thick, minimum.

1. Pad Size: 24" x 24".

2.10 SKYLIGHT UNITS

A. Skylight Units: Polyurethane Construction, seamless frame construction, curb mounted,

double glazed acrylic dome – clear/white as provided by the roof system manufacturer with

90% haze.

1. Frames shall be condensation resistant, thermally broken with integral weep system.

2. Provide adapter curb as required to fit existing curb openings. Adapter curbs shall be

supplied by the roofing system manufacturer and shall be included in the system

warranty.

3. Skylight domes shall be designed and manufactured to support a 40 pound live load

and meet or exceed the intent of OSHA Fall Protection Regulations (i.e. no breakage

or disengagement of domes from the frames shall occur upon impact up to 1,000

pounds).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:






1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and

roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof

deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of existing cement fiber decking

complies with requirements for cementitious wood fiber decks.

4. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no

adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing

installation according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp

projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling

or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is

taking place or when rain is forecast.


A. Comply with built-up roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Asphalt Heating: Heat and apply SEBS-modified roofing asphalt according to roofing


3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at

junctures of built-up roofing with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line, with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4

inch with insulation.

1. Stagger joints of insulation from joints in existing decking

2. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and

does not restrict flow of water.






E. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical

surfaces.

F. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install base layer of insulation and secure to deck using

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof

insulation to existing cementitious wood fiber decks, attaching through the decking to the

underside or to a structural member. Adhere additional sheets of insulation to the base

sheet per NRCA recommendations.

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified

Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.5 BUILT-UP ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions and applicable

recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of

Built-up Roofing."

B. If required start installation of built-up roofing in presence of manufacturer's technical

personnel.

C. Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of built-up roofing

not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of

the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed built-up roofing sheets

and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt

with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent

water from entering completed sections of roofing.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.6 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install one ply base sheets starting at low point of roofing. Align ply sheets without

stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies

throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply

sheets over and terminate beyond cants.

1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate

required by roofing manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets

touching.






B. Cap Sheet: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing. Offset laps

from laps of preceding ply sheets, and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to

shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.

1. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by

built-up roofing manufacturer.

3.7 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges,

and at penetrations through roof; secure to substrates according to built-up roofing

manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by built-up roofing manufacturer.

2. Backer-Sheet Application: Adhere backer sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.

3. Flashing-Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied

adhesive at rate required by roofing manufacturer.

B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above built-up roofing

and 4 inches onto field of built-up roofing.

C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.

1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt

roofing cement.

3.8 COATING INSTALLATION

A. After roof and flashing system have completely cured in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions, apply coating to built-up roofing and base flashings according to

manufacturer's written instructions, by spray, roller, or other suitable application method to

provide a dry film thickness of not less than 20 mils.

3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads, using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of

manufacturer's standard size, according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Set walkway pads in additional pour coat of hot roofing asphalt after sweeping away

loose aggregate surfacing.







A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate

conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage

components, and to furnish reports to Architect. Refer to CPSM Appendix A, A.21 and

A.22 for requirements.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of built-up roofing where test results or

inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect built-up roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to

Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove built-up roofing that does not comply with requirements,

repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing to a condition free of damage and

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and

procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.






SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured through-wall flashing.

2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.

3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

5. Formed equipment support flashing.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Section 074213.13 "Formed Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim

integral with metal wall panels.

3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof

hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.

4. Section 079513.16 "Exterior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for manufactured

expansion-joint cover assemblies for exterior building walls, soffits, and parapets.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of

penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall

materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.






2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment

curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing

installation.




components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.




C. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.


2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed

details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and

location in Project.

4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.

7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.

8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.

9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets,

and counterflashings as applicable.

10. Include details of special conditions.

11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with

factory-applied finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam

and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other

attachments.







2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous

Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other

exposed accessories.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1

tested.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in

maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal

flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record

of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as

able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that

might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim

materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to

sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing

and trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal

flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within









ASTM D 2244.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed

sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions

and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested according

to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.


changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to

comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat and with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both

sides.






2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and

apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin

manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic

or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-

resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or

SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to

withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to

written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and

as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless


B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by

manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or

factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers

under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for

metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-

dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Solder:






1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50

percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining

tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric [polyurethane] [polysulfide] [silicone]

polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet

metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for

application.

2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal

flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to

provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on

exterior face to receive counterflashing.

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. Finish 2D (Dull, Cold Rolled)

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cheney Flashing Company: Cheney Flashing Dovetail or Sawtooth.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: STF Sawtooth Flashing.

3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking

Thruwall Flashing.

4) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Pre-formed Metal Flashing.

B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking

of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated or with

interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hickman or

comparable product.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.

3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at

top edge.

4. Finish: 2D (Dull, Cold Rolled).













A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and

recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing

and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and

metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges

folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed

fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of

installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on

Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching

profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,

filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to

provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal

standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or

from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and

seal with epoxy seam sealer.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof and Roof-to-Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following

materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch thick.






B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings

to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end

dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting


1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or








3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use

of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to

shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to

manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of

mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.

Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature

restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing

underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of

not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than

3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely

in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners[, solder],

protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to

complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform,

neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before

fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two

fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of

buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts

pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or

corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent

separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

C. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener

manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to

minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight

installation.






E. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint

members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.

When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set

joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for

installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at

temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200

"Joint Sealants."

F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and

cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to

line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently

watertight and weather resistant.

B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited

sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate

at 16-inch centers.

2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes

at 24-inch centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with

top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing.

Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base

flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend

counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4

inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets

and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with

installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and

clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture

according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation






of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and

louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000

"Unit Masonry."

C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar

flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to

equipment support member.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed

tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and

within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and

trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused

materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim

manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during

construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated

beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copings.

2. Roof-edge specialties.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site-fabricated

sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof

hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.

4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties

and adjacent materials.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing

and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system

manufacturer's representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers

whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing

materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness

and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that

will affect roof specialties.









components and profiles, and finishes.




C. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to

other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including

direction of expansion and contraction.

3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other

attachments.

4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.

5. Include details of special conditions.

D. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied

color finishes.

F. Samples for Verification:

1. Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in

manufacturer's standard sizes.

2. Include copings roof-edge specialties roof-edge drainage systems made from 12-inch

lengths of full-size components in specified material, and including fasteners, cover

joints, accessories, and attachments.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty.

C. Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.








A. Source Limitations: Obtain roof specialties approved by manufacturer providing roofing-

system warranty specified in Section 075113 "Built-Up Asphalt Roofing".


A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field

measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets,

roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure,

and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Section

075113 “Built-Up Asphalt Roofing ".

B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof

specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified

warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


ASTM D 2244.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist

thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement

due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-

1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of






components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements.

Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and

nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 COPINGS

A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section

lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and

concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.


the following:

a. Architectural Products Company.


c. Cheney Flashing Company.

d. Hickman Company, W. P.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Coping Caps: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal

0.034-inch thickness.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.


3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material.

a. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches

wide, with integral cleats.

b. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-

resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt

adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by

underlayment manufacturer.











1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus

20 deg F.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to

meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching

color of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-

dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric [polyurethane] [silicone] polymer sealant of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for

each application.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

D. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for

application.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the

range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed

metal surfaces to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M and coating and resin


a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and






apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin


b. Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard

acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a

minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and

securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply

with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle

free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered

24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with

roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

1. Apply continuously under copings roof-edge specialties and reglets and

counterflashings.

2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties

with requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.

B. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of

mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with

lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor

roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use

fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.






1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-

canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.

3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.

4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.

5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals

from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties with

bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious

construction.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers

of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of

corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set

joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for

installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less

than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws or substrate not less

than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely

concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin

edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where

pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets

using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder

and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from

exposed surfaces.

3.4 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices

with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to

meet performance requirements.






1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor

plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets

performance requirements.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with

concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing

to meet performance requirements.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are

installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused

fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in

a clean condition during construction.

C. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof curbs.

2. Equipment supports.

3. Roof hatches.

4. Pipe and duct supports.


1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal

flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet

metal trim and accessories.

2. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops,

gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.

3. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for manufactured roof

expansion-joint covers.

4. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for special curbs

designed to accommodate seismic and vibration controls.

5. Section 233423 "HVAC Power Ventilators" for power roof-mounted ventilators.

6. Section 237413 "Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units" for

standard curbs specified with rooftop units.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base

flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,

secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be

supported.







A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.



B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate

dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-

assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on

Samples of size to adequately show color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-

mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit.

4. Required clearances.

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of


1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


ASTM D 2244.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist

thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement

due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live

and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings,

bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements;

with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed deck-

mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment

to be supported.

C. Supported Load Capacity: As indicated on the mechanical drawings and specifications.

D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.

1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

2. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

E. Construction:

1. Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system.

2. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck-

mounting flange or by use of leveler frame.

3. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb

height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is

level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

4. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.

5. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.

6. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps,

welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of

curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.






7. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide

weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal

sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

8. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal

and finish as curb.

9. Security Grille: Provide where indicated.

10. Damper Tray: Where indicated, provide damper tray or shelf with opening 3 inches.

2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced perimeter metal equipment supports capable of

supporting superimposed live and dead loads between structural supports, including

equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, spanning between structural

supports; capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically

fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed structure-mounting flange at

bottom.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment

to be supported.

C. Supported Load Capacity: As indicated on the mechanical drawings and specifications.

D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.

1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.


E. Construction:

1. Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system.

2. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.

3. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and

finish.

4. Nailer: Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide, continuous

around support perimeter.

5. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps,

welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of

curb of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.

6. Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment,

provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with

metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

7. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal

and finish as equipment support.

8. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to

accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip

supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.

9. Security Grille: Provide where indicated on Drawings.






2.4 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded

or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing

and weathertight perimeter gasketing, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at

perimeter bottom.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Bilco company (the).

b. Nystrom.

c. O'Keeffe's Inc.

d. RTA Manufacturing.

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 36 by 30 inches.

C. Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

1. Thickness: 14 Gauge Minimum Thickness.

2. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer or powder coat.


D. Construction:

1. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal

liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.

2. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.

3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless


4. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter

curb height that is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that

obstructs water flow.

E. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, galvanized-steel spring latch with turn handles,

galvanized-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

2.5 METAL GUARD RAIL SYSTEM

A. Provide a pre-engineered metal guard rail system at the locations around the new roof

hatches. Guard rail system shall be a steel rail system mounted vertically to the exterior

housing of the hatch. System shall be OSHA approved and installed per the manufacturer’s

recommendations to meet OSHA fall protection requirements.

1. Guard rail system shall be SafePro ‘Roof Hatch Rails’ or equal.








2.6 PIPE AND DUCT SUPPORTS

A. Adjustable-Height Structure-Mounted Pipe Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, provide

extruded-aluminum tube, filled with urethane insulation; 2 inches in diameter;

accommodating up to 7-inch- diameter pipe or conduit, with provision for pipe retainer;

with aluminum baseplate, EPDM base seal, manufacturer's recommended hardware for

mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, stainless-steel roller and retainer,

and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.

2.7 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.

2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and

white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum

dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer

and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF

resin by weight.

4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic

or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M


D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube.

E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.






B. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, thickness as indicated.

C. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal

resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.

D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as

indicated.

E. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for

aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or

chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

F. Security Grilles: 3/4-inch diameter, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M steel bars spaced 6 inches

o.c. in one direction and 12 inches o.c. in the other; factory finished as follows:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if any, from uncoated steel,

complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-

SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below

immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

3. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-

free, universal primer; selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for

compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for

capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats under prolonged

exposure.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

H. Underlayment:

1. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,

nonperforated.

2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

4. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of

slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-

modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer

when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

5. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for

application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish

of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed

fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

6. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300

stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or

ASTM F 2329.

7. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

8. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.






I. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or

silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

J. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as

recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

K. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

L. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required

for application.

2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping,

jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated

loads.






3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to

complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking,

or loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals

from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum or stainless-steel roof accessories with

bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious

construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's

recommended slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers

of roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.

D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with

each other.

E. Roof-Hatch Installation:

1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating

mechanism and hardware.

2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.

3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install supports and

attachments as required to properly support piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

horizontal piping, and support together.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Space supports for smallest pipe size or install intermediate

supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

G. Security Grilles: Weld bar intersections and, using tamper-resistant bolts, attach the ends of

bars to structural frame or primary curb walls.

H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.






B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according

to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.







PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.


1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated

construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.




1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for




B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a



A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have

been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.








A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to

comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other

causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions

using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.

C. Notify Owner’s testing agency at least 7 days in advance of fire-resistive joint system

installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.

Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a


1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."






2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and

other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates

forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential

of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of

less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed

to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components

specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing

and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

2. Substrate primers.

3. Collars.

4. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to

one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure

during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no

solvents or inorganic fibers.







F. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,

expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

G. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,

comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for

accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection

of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to

produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for

application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings

immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces

capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials.

Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow

spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.






3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials

during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and

depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of

firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and

penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems

with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using

lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end

of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal

or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of

penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove

penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type

labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are

placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.







A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to

ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with

requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and

with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure

that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of

Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,

immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material

and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.






JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-staining silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.

4. Butyl joint sealants.

5. Latex joint sealants.


1. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated

construction.




A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.


1. Product Data: For lgCC Section 806.2: For architectural sealants and other sealant

primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC Content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured

sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples

with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of

material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.







E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the

testing indicated.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion

to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical

representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail

Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite

side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.






5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include

data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For

sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere

to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by

joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants

from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and

application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field

experience.

B. VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of

250 g/L or less.

3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of

775 g/L or less.

4. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m or 7 ppb,

whichever is less.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.



to the following:

a. Bostik Inc.; Chem-Calk 1200.

b. Dow Corning Corporation.

c. Pecora Corporation; 860.

d. Sika Corporation US; Sikasil – GP.

2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to

ASTM C 1248.










B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone

joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.



to the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation.

b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.;

Bondaflex Sil 295 FPS NB.

c. Pecora Corporation.

d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and

minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1.

b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk.

c. Pecora Corporation.

d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; Permathane SM7108.

e. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic.

B. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25

percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.



a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.

b. Pecora Corporation.

c. Schnee Morehead, Inc.; an ITW company; Permathane SM7101.

d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede 1SL.

C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.













a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2.

b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 885 SG.

c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 NS.

d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.

e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS or

Sikaflex - 2c EZ Mix.

f. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.

2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with

fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-

component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-

use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White.

b. GE Construction Sealansts; SCS17-00 Sanitary.

c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.;

Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311.


the following:

a. Bostik, Inc.: Chem-Calk 300.

b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.

c. Dow Corning Corporation.

2.7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.



to the following:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456801381&mf=04&src=wd















a. BASF Construction Chemicals LLC; building systems: Sono lac.

b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,

primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant

manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.



to the following:

a. BASF Corporation; Construction Chemicals LLC, building systems, or

comparable product.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface

skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for

joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise

contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials

or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion

of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-

substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of

staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and

formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and

surfaces adjacent to joints.









PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following

requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion

of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings

tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer),

old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and

frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or

a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of

developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after

cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free

compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that

do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion

of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or

as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply

primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to

areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.






C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer

with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such

contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of

joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at

position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative

to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application,

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between

sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same

time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to

form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to

ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise

indicated.







A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 2 tests for the first 20 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and

joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per

each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.

Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to

joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test

each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if

adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test

criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether

joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant

configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same

procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are

clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with

indicated requirements.






3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants

and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so

sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite

such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or

deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are

indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Tile control and expansion joints.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Joints between metal panels.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.


colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.






2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.


colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Tile control and expansion joints.

c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.


colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.


colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.


colors.

G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds.

b. Sill plates.






2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.


colors.






HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 083473.13 "Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies" for packaged, acoustical

hollow-metal door and frame assemblies with STC ratings of 35 or more.

2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

3. Section 081213 "Special Hollow Metal Frames" for metal frames to receive sound

control and bullet resistant glazing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,

anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for

installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance

ratings, and finishes.









C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal

thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal

thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5

inches.

F. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack

welded to jambs and mullions.







C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on

minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each

stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the

following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.

2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.

3. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.

4. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; Assa Abloy Group Company.

5. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single

manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings

indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Fire Rated Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed 2nd labeled by a

quality testing agency, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing at

positive pressure (Category A) according to NFPA 252.

B. All modifications to Fire rated doors and frames for electric and mortised hardware shall be

made by the manufacturer of the door and frame. Field modifications shall not be

permitted.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by

a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-

protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.












B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042

inch.

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core

at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door

frame.

c. Construction: Face welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core

at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.






b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door

frame.

c. Construction: Face welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 BORROWED LITES

A. Hollow-metal frames of metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

B. Construction: Face welded.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,

not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2

inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than

0.042 inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to

wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch,

and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish

floor surface.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of


B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

suitable for exposed applications.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation;

mill phosphatized.







1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according

to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory

devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);

consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and

smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film

thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur

components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately

form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where

practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at

Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before

shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical

stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical

webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5

inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at

manufacturer's discretion.

4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as

face sheets.

5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment

of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.






7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required

by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4

inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with

published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness

metal as frames.

1. Sidelite Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,

fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to

jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per

anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk

holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom

of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and

as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom

of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door

silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

8. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45-degree angle

cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension






of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with

frame.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted

door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of

hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each

glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior

doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and

installation types indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish

consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C,

with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-

inch-thick steel frame.






1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y

blades.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before

frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance

of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and

invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted

door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80 and

the proper UL list requirements, including door and frame manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed

lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or

NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.






1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary

braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured.

d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop

Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout.

5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with

postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,

flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances

specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.






D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with

hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly

not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise

unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair

paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for

factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.






SPECIAL HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 - 1

SECTION 081213 – SPECIAL HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal sound control frames and hollow metal frame for bullet

resistant view window system.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for view window with insulating laminated acoustical

glass installed in hollow metal frames.

2. Section 088000 “Glazing” bullet resistant glass view window (GL-4) to be installed

in doors.

3. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealant" for acoustical joint sealant application.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,

anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for

installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions and finishes.









C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal

thicknesses.

2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

3. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

4. Details of moldings, stops and glazing.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: Prepare Samples to demonstrate compliance with requirements

for quality of materials and construction. Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors,

and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if

applicable.

F. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding

limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Sound Rating: Provide sound control frame assemblies identical to those of assemblies

tested as sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following

minimum rating:

1. STC Rating: STC 40 minimum calculated by ASTM E 413 when tested in an

operable condition according to ASTM E 90.

2.2 SOUND CONTROL FRAMES

A. Frames: Fabricate sound control door frames with corners mitered, reinforced, and

continuously welded the full depth and width of frame. Fabricate according to NAAMM-

HMMA 865.

1. Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820.

2. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated,

0.075-inch nominal thickness or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated.

3. Head Reinforcement: Metallic-coated steel channel or angle stiffener, 0.108-inch

nominal thickness.

4. Jamb Anchors:

a. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame

size, not less than 0.064-inch nominal-thickness metallic-coated steel with

corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long;

or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch thick.

b. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum

3/8-inch-diameter, metallic-coated steel bolts with expansion shields or inserts.

Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate,

welded to frame at each anchor location.

5. Floor Anchors: Not less than 0.079-inch nominal-thickness metallic-coated steel, and

as follows:

a. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners.

b. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension

clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of

frames at finish floor surface.

B. Materials:






1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of


2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),

Type B, with G60 zinc (galvanized) or A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating

designation.

3. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior

walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

4. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip

galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

5. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or

other accessory devices for attaching sound control door frames of type indicated.

6. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers,

or glass fibers.

C. Finishes

1. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and

pretreating.

a. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free

primer complying with SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by

primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied

coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer and finish coats,

complying with SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria.

a. Color and Gloss: To match adjacent hollow-metal door frames.

2.3 FRAMES FOR BULLET RESISTANT VIEW WINDOWS

A. Frames: Fabricate view window frames with corners mitered and continuously welded the

full depth and width of frame. Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 865.

1. Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820.

2. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated,

0.075-inch nominal thickness or thicker as required to provide rigid anchor to

specified bullet-proof acrylic sheets.

3. Frame Accessories and Anchorage: Provide armor plate welded or installed within

the frame as recommended by bullet proof glazing manufacturer to provide rigid and

stable installation of bullet-proof glazing and to comply with specified ballistic

protection.

B. Finishes






1. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and

pretreating.

a. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free

primer complying with SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by

primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied

coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer and finish coats,

complying with SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria.

a. Color and Gloss: To match adjacent hollow-metal door frames.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Sound Control Frame Fabrication: Fabricate sound control frames to be rigid and free of

defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with

minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in

manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that

cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and

invisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same

thickness metal as frames.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot

welds per anchor.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom

of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height.

3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches in height.

4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches, or fraction thereof, more than 96 inches in height.

5. Head Reinforcement: For grouted frames more than 48 inches wide, weld continuous

head reinforcement to back of frame at head full width of opening.

6. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware cutouts and glazing-stop

screw and sound control seal preparations to close off interior of openings in frames

to be grouted.






7. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 865.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before

frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance

of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and

invisible on exposed faces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install sound control frames in sizes and profiles indicated.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary

braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint






continuously; grind, fill, and dress; make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on

exposed faces.

b. Install sound control frames with removable glazing stops located on secure

side of opening.

c. Remove temporary braces only after frames or bucks have been properly set

and secured.

d. Check squareness, twist, and plumbness of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

e. Apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of frames to be filled with mortar,

grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop

Drawings.

3. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill

and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

4. Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or

damaged by grout forces.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust sound control door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line

from head to floor.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with

hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine

screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c.

from each corner.







A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that

is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair

paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for

factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.






FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

2. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Door Frames" for metal door frames.

3. Section 081213 “"Special Hollow Metal Frames" for frames to receive sound control

and bullet resistant glazing.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim

for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.





material.


costs.




C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of

door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.










2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

3. Dimensions and locations of frames and blocking for bullet resistant view windows.

4. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.

5. Undercuts.

6. Requirements for veneer matching.

7. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

8. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches

(200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and

transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and

grain to be expected in finished Work.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door

faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.

a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.

b. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-

finished doors.

3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish

required.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and






maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during

remainder of construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-

inch span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to

repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

2. Eggers Industries.

3. Graham Wood Doors; ASSA ABLOY Group Company.

4. Marlite.

5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.

6. VT Industries Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer.

2.2 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.

2. Species: Cherry.

3. Cut: Rotary cut.

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match.













6. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.

Corridor-door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or

more.

7. Core: Particleboard.

8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is

abrasive planed before veneering.

2.3 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood

beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.

2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements

of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,

BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and

alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for

pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply

with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete

fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not

surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.






B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.

2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System

10, UV curable, water based.

3. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

4. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

5. Effect: Open-grain finish.

6. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,

location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and

plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions

and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required

at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no

evidence of repair or refinishing.





OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulated service doors.

2. Counter doors.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.


components, profiles for slats, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished accessories.

3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or

detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads

imposed on structure.

4. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and

contraction and for excluding and draining moisture to the exterior.

5. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories.

6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.






C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and

textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in

manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Curtain slats.

2. Bottom bar with sensor edge.

3. Guides.

4. Brackets.

5. Hood.

6. Locking device(s).

7. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.



B. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that

exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.



and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for

this Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single

manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.







A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330.

3. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load

without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable

under design wind load, acting inward and outward.

2.3 INSULATED SERVICE DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Service Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking

metal slats.



to, the following:

a. ACME Rolling Doors.

b. Cookson Company.

c. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than

20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to

the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to

ASTM E 283.

D. Curtain R-Value: 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu (0.792 K x sq. m/W).

E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 3-1/4-inch center-to-center height.

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.

2. Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.

G. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated

from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door.

H. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.










I. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Shape: Square.

2. Mounting: Face of wall.

J. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly and chain lock keeper.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside and

outside with cylinders.

K. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.

1. Provide operator with through-wall shaft operation.

L. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per

day.

2. Operator Location: Front of hood.

3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior.

5. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type.

6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic; self-monitoring type.

7. Control Station(s): Interior mounted.

M. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals push/pull handles.

N. Door Finish:

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.

2.4 COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY



following:

1. ACME Rolling Doors.

2. Cookson Company.

3. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.

B. Door Curtain Material: Stainless Steel.

C. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/2-inch center-to-center height.










1. Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.

D. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape fabricated

stainless steel and finished to match adjacent counter.

E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide

continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize

operational noise.

F. Hood: Stainless steel.

1. Shape: Square or as shown on Drawings.

2. Mounting: As shown on Drawings.

G. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Stainless steel.

1. Mounting: Face of wall unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside and

outside with cylinders.

I. Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation.

J. Door Finish:

1. Stainless steel: No. 4 (polished directional satin)

2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Stainless steel to match finish of exterior curtain-slat

face


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed

to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without

splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties

recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and

as follows:

1. Stainless-Steel Door Curtain Slats: ASTM A 666, Type 304; sheet thickness of 0.025

inch; and as required.






2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum

steel thickness of 0.010 inch

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same

material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and

strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading.

Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent

overtravel of curtain.

2.7 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism

at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce

top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia

for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with

intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch-thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90

zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

2. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a

perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.

2.8 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware".

2. Keys: Provide 6 master keys for each master key set. Provide 3 change keys for each

lock. Provide 2 control keys for core removal. Stamp keys “do not duplicate”.

B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to

disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.9 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets

fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless


1. At door head, use 1/8-inch-thick, replaceable, continuous-sheet baffle secured to

inside of hood or field- installed on the header.






2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch-thick seals

of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.

B. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable,

continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

C. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting

handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.10 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in

a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or

self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,

structural-quality, seamless or welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall

thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel

deflection to not more than 0.03 in. /ft. of span under full load.

C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs.

Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from

outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.

D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled

steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel

plate.

2.11 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Push-up Door Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with

counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not

exceed 25 lbf.

C. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and

guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum [25-lbf] [30-lbf] <Insert value> force for

door operation. Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

D. Crank Operator: Consisting of crank and crank gearbox, steel crank drive shaft, and gear-

reduction unit, of type indicated. Size gears to require not more than [25-lbf] [30-lbf]






<Insert value> force to turn crank. Fabricate gearbox to be oil tight and to completely

enclose operating mechanism. Provide manufacturer's standard crank-locking device.

2.12 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided

by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric

motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated

brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and

accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,

with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less

than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door.

1. Top-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door head plate with

the operator on top of the door-hood assembly and connected to the door drive shaft

with drive chain and sprockets. Headroom is required for this type of mounting.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure

indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase.

b. Volts: 115 V.

c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start,

accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less

than 8 in. /sec. and not more than 12 in. /sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or

service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring:

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other

electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor

controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.






F. Obstruction Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated

automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated

doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or

weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.

Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling

cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with

door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor

edge.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact

push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-

button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with

general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted,

weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for

emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door

operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect

mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency

manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch.

Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to

automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.


A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.









2.14 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2.15 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting

of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written

instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written

instructions and as specified.

B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations

indicated for each door.

C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes

in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Power-Operated Doors: Install automatic garage doors openers according to UL 325.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.






3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system.

Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of

warp, twist, or distortion.

1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather-resistant.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service

shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of coiling-door Installer.

Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for door operation. Parts and

supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working

hours.

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, seven-day-per-week, emergency callback service.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.






SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1

SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.


components, profile door sections, and finishes.


furnished accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or

detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads

imposed on structure.


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in

manufacturer's standard sizes:






1. Frame for paneled door sections; of each width of stile and rail required.



B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.



and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for

this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and

ICC A117.1.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Failure of components or operators before reaching required number of

operation cycles.

c. Faulty operation of hardware.

d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use; rust through.

e. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show

evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements

specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other

defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing

components.

B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330.

3. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without

evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

a. Deflection of door sections in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120

of the door width.

b. Deflection of horizontal track assembly shall not exceed 1/240 of the door

height.

4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable

under design wind load, acting inward and outward.

2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Full-Vision Aluminum Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and

fabricated according to DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.


the following:

a. Amarr Garage Doors.

b. Arm-R-Lite.

c. C.H.I. Overhead Doors, Inc.

d. Clopay Building Products.

e. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties.

f. Haas Door.

g. Hörmann LLC.














h. Martin Door Manufacturing.

i. Overhead Door Corporation: 511 Series Basis of Design Product.

j. Raynor.

k. Rite-Hite Corporation.

l. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

m. Windsor Door.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than

10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to

the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.4 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to

ASTM E 283.

D. Aluminum Sections: Full vision.

E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track.

F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door.

G. Windows: Approximately installed with glazing of the following type:

1. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard.

H. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Locking bars, operable from inside and outside, with

cylinders.

J. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.

K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Light duty, up to 10 cycles per hour.

2. Operator Type: Manufacturer's standard for door requirements.

3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted

at 8 feet or lower.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry.

5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.

6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor.

7. Control Station: Interior-side mounted.

L. Door Finish:












1. Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


2.5 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS

A. Sections: Extruded-aluminum stile and rail members with dimensions and profiles as

indicated on Drawings; members joined by welding or with concealed, 1/4-inch-minimum

diameter, aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door

section; and with meeting rails shaped to provide a weather-resistant seal.

1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 extrusions, alloy and temper standard with manufacturer

for type of use and finish indicated; minimum thickness 0.065 inch for door section

1-3/4 inches deep, and as required to comply with requirements.

2. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as

required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Ensure that reinforcement does not

obstruct vision lites.

3. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

B. Full-Vision Sections: Manufacturer's standard, tubular, aluminum-framed section fully

glazed with 6-mm-thick, clear acrylic glazing set in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing

channel and with removable extruded-vinyl or aluminum stops.

2.6 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated,

sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on

Drawings, Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to

ensure rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and

loading.

1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, minimum G60 zinc coating.

2. Slope tracks at an angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs

when door unit is closed.

3. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track

without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical

sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device.

a. For Vertical Track: Continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and

attached to wall with jamb brackets.






b. For Horizontal Track: Continuous reinforcing angle from curve in track to end

of track, attached to track and supported at points by laterally braced

attachments to overhead structural members.

B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets

of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless


C. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type, size, and in arrangement

indicated. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors

and elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same

material as door-section frames.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel,

or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch-nominal coated

thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's

written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and

rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners

where access to nuts is impossible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors

more than 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted

with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges

where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch-diameter roller tires for 3-inch-wide track

and 2-inch-diameter roller tires for 2-inch-wide track.

2.8 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware".

2. Keys: Six (6) for each cylinder.

B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to

disengage power supply when door is locked.






2.9 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs

fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on

torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of

operation cycles indicated.

B. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to

the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

C. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening

operation.

2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and

guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf force for door operation. Provide

alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

2.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided

by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric

motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated

brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and

accessories required for proper operation.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Chamberlain Group, Inc. (The).

2. Comply with NFPA 70.

3. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6;

with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less

than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets,

chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.








1. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall on right

or left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive

chain.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch)] for motor exposure

indicated.

1. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start,

accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less

than 8 in. /sec. and not more than 12 in. /sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or

service factor.

2. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring:

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other

electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

4. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators.

E. Limit Switches: Equip motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor

controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated

automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of

device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an

obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit

to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring

feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact

push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure, push-

button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with

general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted,

weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered door with capability for

emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door

operation does not exceed 25 lbf.

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect

mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency

manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch.






Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to

automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,

inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions

and as specified.

B. Tracks:

1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than

24 inches apart.

2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or

channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway

bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track

and door-operating equipment.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in

compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.






3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of

warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather-resistant fit around entire perimeter.

D. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and

abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.






ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior storefront framing.

2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.


1. Section 087100 “Door Hardware”.

2. Section 083100.01 “Access Control”.

3. Section 088000 “Glazing”.






Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.



C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,

sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of

aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.







b. Anchorage.

c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.

e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from

12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.

5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to

ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.



B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts,

accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each

aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed

by a qualified testing agency.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in










B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements

for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are

indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and

assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory

data to Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-

framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or

replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within


1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


ASTM D 2244.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this

Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other

defects in construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of

supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column

shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and

concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.

c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:


C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction

perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each

individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual

glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,

whichever is smaller.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,

or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:






a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of

1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when

tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of

positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when

tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure,

but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-

factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to

NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat

gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-

certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to

NFRC 500.

I. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332,

as follows.

1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 26.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes:


2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on

framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according

to AAMA 501.5.

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior

metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F.






b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.

c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS



following:

1. Arcadia, Inc.

2. CMI Architectural.

3. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.

4. Coral Industries, Inc.

5. EFCO Corporation.

6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company; Trifab VG 451/451T Basis of Design

Product.

7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.

8. Manko Window Systems, Inc.

9. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.

10. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

11. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.

12. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.

13. Tubelite Inc.

14. U.S. Aluminum; a brand of C.R. Laurence.

15. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront

system, including framing, spandrel panels, and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

3. Glazing Plane: Front.

4. Finish: Clear anodic finish.

5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if

not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.






















D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.

c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface

preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to

recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable

SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing

operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with

reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate

concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate

aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the

interior.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in

Section 087100 "Door Hardware."






2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California




whichever is less.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that

accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with

adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M

requirements.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by

descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:








1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior

for spandrel glazing or metal panels.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation

and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in

adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest

extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before

applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.







3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation

includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action

by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this

purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200

"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust

weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to

sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler

behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door

hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions

using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.







A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the

following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet.

3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up

to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1

inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or

more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of

aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated

by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water

penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass

tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,

and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six

months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer.

Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective






components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door

hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the

same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.







FOLDING AUTOMATIC DOORS 084229.13 - 1

SECTION 084229.13 - FOLDING AUTOMATIC DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior, folding, power-operated automatic entrances.


1. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glazing in automatic doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.

B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door

operator to open the door.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.

E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks that

control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified elsewhere.

B. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for

installing automatic entrances.

C. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,

hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware

required for rest of Project.






D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances

with connections to power supplies and access-control system.




components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances.


furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment

details.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection.


4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices.

5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and

locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied metal-clad finishes.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.


standard sizes.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance. Include emergency-exit features

of automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a


D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control

systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM

indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who

employs a Certified Inspector.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than three hours' normal travel time from

Installer's place of business to Project site.

C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic

entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.


weathering and use.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which

finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



ASTM D 2244.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain folding and sliding automatic entrances from single source from

single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


C. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.


A. Opening Force:

1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbs required to manually set door in motion

if power fails, and not more than 15 lbs required to close door or open door to

minimum required width.

2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 15 lbf required for a

breakaway door or panel to open to full open position.

B. Entrapment-Prevention Force:

1. Power-Operated Folding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent stopped

door in the last 10 degrees of opening from moving in the direction of opening; not

more than 30 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing.

2.3 FOLDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, framing,

headers, overhead tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete

installation.

B. Folding, Power-Operated Automatic Entrance – B102A:



to, the following:

a. Horton Doors: Folding Access 4-4200 basis of design product.

b. Stanley Access Technology.

c. Tormax Automatic.








2. Configuration: Two pairs of folding doors (biparting) that fold to each side of door

opening.

a. Traffic Pattern: Two way.

b. Mounting: Between jambs.

3. Operator Features:

a. Power opening and power closing.

b. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.

c. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds.

d. Obstruction recycle.

e. Automatic door re-open if stopped while closing.

f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated.

4. Folding-Door Overhead Tracks: Assembly consisting of guide-track and breakaway

system; secured to header. Connect one folding leaf at the top to door operator, and

set on a floor-mounted bottom pivot; no bottom track is permitted.

5. Controls: Activation and safety devices according to BHMA standards.

a. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to

detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.

b. Safety Device: Presence sensor mounted on horizontal door muntin to detect

pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.

6. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic finish.

2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS

A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as

required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches.

2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.

B. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with

reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length

of top and bottom rails.


preformed gaskets.

2. Stile Design: Narrow stile, 2-1/8-inch nominal width.

3. Rail Design: 5-inch nominal height.

4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and

finish.






C. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch-thick extruded aluminum and extending full

width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or

removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure

panels to prevent unauthorized access.

1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims

for aligning system components.

E. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard.

1. Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process.

2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is installed.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

2. Sheet: ASTM B 209.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-

PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use

surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare

surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled

standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.

F. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and

accessories compatible with adjacent materials.






2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS

A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices,

according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-

free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.

B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door

size, weight, and movement.

1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain

them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.

2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by

fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled

mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with

solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power

off.

C. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully

enclosed by its plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions

required by BHMA A156.10.

1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.

D. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide

detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active

at all times.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware

manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.

B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in

direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open

door shall be as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. Interrupt powered

operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.

C. Hinges:

1. Center-Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with exposed parts of cast-aluminum

alloy.

2. Offset Pivots: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with exposed parts of cast-aluminum alloy.

D. Magnetic Locking:

1. Electromagnetic lock that hold panels in locked position under normal conditions

with 1,000 lbs. minimum force. Depressed panic bar releases magnetic lock and






allows panel to break out 90º from any position of travel. In the event of power

outage, lock would be released. In the event of power outage, door could be

manually locked by using key cylinder lock at vertical rail.

E. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by two sided keyed cylinder, with minimum 1-inch-long

throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

1. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system.

2. Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

3. Two-Point Locking for Biparting-Folding Doors: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, mortise-

type, laminated-steel hookbolt mounted in stile of active door leaf that engages active

leaf of opposite door when operated by cylinder; and with concealed, vertical flush

bolts mounted in each hinge stile that engage header when operated by cylinders.

F. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, extruded-aluminum raised thresholds; with beveled edges

with a slope of not more than 1:2 and a maximum height of 1/2 inch. Provide cutouts as

required for door operating hardware.

G. Finger Guards: Collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Guide Rails: Anodized aluminum, fabricated from bars or tubing, minimum 30 inches high,

and finished to match doors unless otherwise indicated; positioned and projecting from face

of door jamb for distance as indicated, but not less than that required by BHMA A156.10

for type of door and direction of travel; with filler panel.

1. Filler Panel: Expanded aluminum mesh.

a. Orient expanded aluminum mesh with long dimension of diamonds parallel to

top rail.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Mounting: Jamb and floor.

3. Aluminum Finish: Class I, clear anodic finish.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses

indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.






2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed

surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are

required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match

framing.

a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by

manufacturer for this purpose.

B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,

assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.

1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints.

Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support

required loads.

2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish

surfaces.

3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.

5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to

produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

6. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from

building structure.

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to

support imposed loads and for installing hardware.

D. Metal Cladding: Factory-fabricated and installed metal cladding, completely covering all

visible surfaces as part of prefabricated entrance assembly before shipment to Project site.


surfaces.





E. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.

F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of

glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."






G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for

final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap

for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

1. Provide finger guards at each folding-door leaf that has clearance at hinge side

greater than 1/4 inch and less than 3/4 inch with door in any position. Anchor guards

to hinge-jamb frame.

H. Controls:

1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as

required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of

automatic entrances.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections

before automatic entrance installation.







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and

cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring,

and connection to the building's power supply.

1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of

burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.




3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.

B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines

and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent

possible.

2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true

to location with anchorage for permanent support.

3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.

C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system.

D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as

specified in Section 281300 "Access Control."

E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's

written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect

control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide

weathertight installation.

1. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

H. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard for

direction of pedestrian travel.

I. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to

terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on

bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.







A. Certified Inspector: Engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components,

assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized

service representative:

1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to

determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

C. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and

lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable

BHMA standards.

1. Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure.

B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation

equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and

sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original

finish.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" for cleaning and maintaining

glass.



shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance

Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or

defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic






entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts

and supplies.

1. Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or

repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to

Owner.


hours.

3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.






SLIDING AUTOMATIC DOORS 084229.23 - 1

SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.


1. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glazing in automatic doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.

B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door

operator to open the door.


D. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.

E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks that

control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified elsewhere.

B. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for

installing automatic entrances.

C. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,

hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware

required for rest of Project.






D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances

with connections to power supplies and access-control system.




components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances.


furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment

details.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection.


4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices.

5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and

locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied metal-clad finishes.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.


standard sizes.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a


D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control

systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM

indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who

employs a Certified Inspector.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than three hours' normal travel time from

Installer's place of business to Project site.

C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic

entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.


weathering and use.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which

finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



ASTM D 2244.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding folding and swinging automatic entrances from single

source from single manufacturer.



C. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.


A. Opening Force:

1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 30 lbs required to manually set door in motion

if power fails, and not more than 15 lbs required to close door or open door to

minimum required width.

2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 15 lbf required for a

breakaway door or panel to open.

3. Opening speed: Door shall open to minimum required width within 10 seconds after

activation of the opening device

B. Entrapment-Prevention Force:

1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent stopped

door from closing.

2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites,

framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories

required for a complete installation.

B. Sliding Automatic Entrance:

1. Single-Sliding Units:

a. Manufacturers

1) Horton Automatics: Profiler Series 2000 Linear drive type 010 single

slide O-SX basis of design product.

2) Stanley Access Technologies.

3) Tormax Automatic.

b. Configuration: single-slide door with one sliding leaf and one sidelight.

c. Traffic Pattern: Two way.







d. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only.

Mounting: Between jambs.

2. Biparting-Sliding Units:

a. Manufacturers

1) Horton Automatics: Profiler Series 2000 linear drive type 110 biparting

O-SX-SX-O basis of design product.

2) Stanley Access Technologies.

3) Tormax Automatic.

b. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors with two sliding leaves and sidelites on

each side.

c. Traffic Pattern: Two way.

d. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only.

e. Mounting: Between jambs.

3. Operator Features:

a. Power opening and closing.

b. Drive System: Chain or belt.

c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.

d. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds.

e. Obstruction recycle.

f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.

g. Integrated standby power supply

h. Door assembly power supply electrically supervised

4. Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with

stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.

a. Configuration: Saddle-type threshold across door opening and surface-

mounted guide-track system at sidelites.

5. Controls: Activation and safety devices according to BHMA standards.

a. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to

detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.

b. Safety Device: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on each

side of door to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from

closing.

c. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on side

of door opening through which doors travel, to detect obstructions and to

prevent door from opening.

6. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic finish.







2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS

A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as

required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches.

2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.

B. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with

reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length

of top and bottom rails.


preformed gaskets.

2. Stile Design: Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch nominal width.

3. Rail Design: 5-inch nominal height.

4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and

finish.

C. Sidelite(s): 1-3/4-inch-deep sidelite(s) with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum

tubular stile and rail members matching door design.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door.


preformed gaskets.

3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile design.

D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch-thick extruded aluminum and extending full

width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or

removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure

panels to prevent unauthorized access.

1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing.

2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb per leaf over spans up to 14 feet

without intermediate supports.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims

for aligning system components.

F. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard.

1. Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process.

2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is installed.






2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

2. Sheet: ASTM B 209.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-

PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use

surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare

surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled

standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.

F. Expanded Aluminum Mesh: Expanded aluminum sheet according to the geometry of

ASTM F 1267.

G. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

H. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

I. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and

accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS

A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices,

according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-

free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.

B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door

size, weight, and movement.

1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain

them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.

2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by

fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled

mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with

solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power

off.






C. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully

enclosed by its plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions

required by BHMA A156.10.

1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.

2. For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully

closed.

D. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide

detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active

at all times.

E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting.

Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

F. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,

provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched,

or bolted.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware

manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.

B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in

direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open

door shall be as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. Interrupt powered

operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.

C. Autolock: Integral lock in header; holds door in lock position until signal received from

controller, door opens and closes, and when door is fully closed the door will again be

locked. Door slide motion only is locked.

1. Fail-safe options – If power fails, door will unlock

D. Dustproof Strikes for All-Glass Sliding Doors: As specified in Section 087100 "Door

Hardware."

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Guide Rails: Anodized aluminum, fabricated from bars or tubing, minimum 30 inches high,

and finished to match doors unless otherwise indicated; positioned and projecting from face

of door jamb for distance as indicated, but not less than that required by BHMA A156.10

for type of door and direction of travel; with filler panel.

1. Mounting: Jamb and floor.

2. Aluminum Finish: Class I, clear anodic finish.






2.9 FABRICATION

A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses

indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed

surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are

required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match

framing.

a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.




B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,

assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.

1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints.

Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support

required loads.


surfaces.





6. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from

building structure.

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to

support imposed loads and for installing hardware.

D. Metal Cladding: Factory-fabricated and installed metal cladding, completely covering all

visible surfaces as part of prefabricated entrance assembly before shipment to Project site.


surfaces.










E. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.

F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of

glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."

G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for

final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap

for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

H. Controls:

1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as

required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.

2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above

finished floor as follows:

a. Top Beam: 48 inches.




B. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise

indicated.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of

automatic entrances.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections

before automatic entrance installation.







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and

cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring,

and connection to the building's power supply.

1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of

burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.




B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines

and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent

possible.

2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true

to location with anchorage for permanent support.

3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.

4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.

C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system.

D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as

specified in Section 281300 "Access Control."

E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's

written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect

control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

F. Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10, including Appendix A, and

manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

G. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

H. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide

weathertight installation.

1. Set thresholds, and bottom-guide-track system, framing members and flashings in

full sealant bed.

2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.






I. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway side-lite as required by

cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel.

J. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to

terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on

bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.


A. Certified Inspector: Engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components,

assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized

service representative:

1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to

determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

C. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and

lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable

BHMA standards.

1. Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure.

B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation

equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and

sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original

finish.






1. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" for cleaning and maintaining

glass.



shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance

Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or

defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic

entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts

and supplies.

1. Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or

repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to

Owner.


hours.

3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.






DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work under this section includes furnishing and the installation of finish and security

hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system,

including any electrified door hardware components including finish and security

hardware and auto operators for entrance doors.

Items include, but are not limited to:

1. Hinges/Continuous Hinges

2. Flush Bolts

3. Exit Devices

4. Locksets and Cylinders

5. Push Plates - Pulls

6. Coordinators

7. Closers/ADA Operators

8. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates

9. Stops, Wall Bumpers, Overhead Controls

10. Thresholds, Gasketing and Door Bottoms

11. Silencers

12. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories

13. Electrified Hardware Items, Controls and Power Supplies

14. Electronic Managed Locksets

B. Related Sections

1. Section 283100.01- Access Control

2. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames

3. Section 08 14 00 – Wood Doors

4. Section 08 41 00 – Entrances and Storefronts

5. Division 26 – Electrical

6. Division 27 – Communications

7. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security

C. Alternates

1. Refer to Division 01 in the project manual for project alternates.






1.2 REFERENCES

A. The following references are used in this section.

1. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors, 2007.

2. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware, DHI, 1984.

3. ANSI / BHMA A156.18, Materials and Finishes, 2006.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled

herein or on drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that

functions properly. Prior to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not

operate properly, are improper for conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.

B. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated

by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and

Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before

checking.

B. Hardware schedule shall clearly indicate architect's hardware group and manufacturer of

each item proposed.

C. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware

Consultant (AHC), who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and

correctness of the schedule.

1. Provide 2 copies of illustrations from manufacturer’s catalogs and data in brochure

form.

2. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding

conditions. Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions in

hardware schedule.

3. Provide listing of manufacturer's template numbers for each item of hardware in

hardware schedule.

4. Furnish other Contractors and Subcontractors concerned with copies of final

approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as

possible to hollow metal, wood door, and aluminum door fabricators in accordance

with schedule they require for fabrication.

5. Samples: Lever design or finish sample: Provide 3 samples if requested by

architect.






D. Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete and detailed system operation and elevation

diagrams specially developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except

openings where only magnetic hold-opens or door position switches are specified.

Provide these diagrams with hardware schedule submittal for approval. Provide detailed

wiring diagrams with hardware delivery to jobsite.

E. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation and adjustment

instructions for finish hardware. Send installation instructions to site with hardware.

F. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame

supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of

cutouts and reinforcing.

G. Shop Drawings Submittal to BCOM: Upon review and approval of the Architect to

Hardware shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit a separate shop drawing submittal

to Architect for BCOM review and approval. The access-control associated hardware

shall be combined with access control shop drawing submittal to BCOM. It is the

contractor’s responsibility to coordinate both materials and equipment to demonstrate

code compliance. Refer to Section 281300.01 “Access Control”, Submittals.

H. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 01700 including specific

requirements indicated below.

1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following:

2. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and

replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

3. Catalog pages for each product.

4. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.

5. Parts list for each product.

6. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect "As installed".

7. Copy of final keying schedule.

8. As installed "Wiring Diagrams" for each opening connected to power, both low

voltage and 110 volts.

9. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of

hardware, including changing of cylinders.


A. General Contractor’s Investigation: Prior to Contract Execution, the General Contractor

shall have thoroughly investigated the entities that will be performing work or supplying

materials, products, equipment, or systems for this project, to ensure that they comply

with all of the qualifications and requirements mentioned or implied in the Contract

Documents. If it is later determined that any of the previously mentioned entities do not

comply with the qualifications and requirements specified in the Contract Documents, the

General Contractor will be required to replace that entity with a qualified entity at no

increase in Contract Sum or Contract Time.






B. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (ie. latch and locksets, hinges, closers) from

single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying

with requirements.

C. Qualifications of the Hardware Supplier: A recognized architectural door hardware

supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware and installation

in the Project’s vicinity for a period of not less than 4 years. The supplier shall be, or shall

employ, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable

times during the course of the work, for consultation about the Project’s hardware

requirements, to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. An Architectural Hardware

Consultant (AHC) shall prepare all hardware and access control schedules. This Supplier

shall be responsible for proper coordination of all finish hardware items and access

control items with related sections to insure compatibility of products.

1. Hardware supplier must be an authorized, direct factory distributor of all door

hardware products specified herein to insure compliance and service of these

products.

2. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain

final instructions in writing.

D. Qualifications of Installer: The hardware installer shall have documented experience in

the installation of hardware of similar quantities and types as required for this project. The

installer’s qualifications shall be submitted to the architect, in writing, for approval by the

architect before any work shall commence.

E. Fire-Rated Openings: Furnish door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with

NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Furnish

only items, of door hardware, that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL,

ITS-WH, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to the Authorities

Having Jurisdiction, for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, in compliance with the

requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive

pressure and S Label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and

coordinated with door and frame manufacturers to ensure that total door opening

engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door

Assemblies.

Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary

marking on doors’ UL or FM labels including “Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit

Hardware”) provide UL/WHI or FM label on exit devices indicating “Fire Exit

Hardware”.

F. Substitutions: All substitution requests are required to be submitted prior to the bid date

and complying with the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 01, General

Requirements. Approval of submitted products is at the discretion of the architect and his

hardware consultant.






G. At the Project’s Completion, the Owner’s Representative shall accompany the Architect

and General Contractor during the Door Hardware and Access Control Items punch list

phase of the project close-out, insuring the Owner’s Representative is familiar with all

applications and systems, as installed. Refer to additional requirements under 3.0

EXECUTION.

H. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to door hardware installation, the General Contractor /

Construction Manager shall request a hardware installation meeting to be held at the

project location. This meeting shall convene prior to the hardware’s installation. The

types of hardware this meeting shall include are: locksets, exit devices, and door closers.

The manufacturer’s representatives of the above listed products, in conjunction with the

hardware supplier for this project, shall conduct the installation training. All hardware

installers shall be required to attend this meeting to receive certificate of authorized

training. This meeting shall serve as door openings coordination and review of all shop

drawings from related trades prior to the hardware installation. The Hardware Supplier

shall include any related meeting costs in their proposal.

I. Electrified Hardware and Security Hardware Systems: Prior to ordering the electrified

hardware, the General Contractor shall request a coordination meeting. This meeting shall

convene prior to or after the Door Hardware Schedule and the wiring diagrams have been

submitted to the General Contractor. All related trades shall be represented at this

meeting, which shall also include the architect, the Owner’s representative, the hardware

supplier, and the hardware manufacturer’s representative as requested. This meeting shall

serve as a review and coordination of all electrified hardware, wiring, connections,

location for power supplies, and remote switches, and door functions. All related trades

shall make any required changes, and resubmit schedules, diagrams, and any other

required data, no later than one (1) week following this meeting.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware

schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received

by the hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers

clearly marked with appropriate hardware set numbers to match the set numbers of the

approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the same

container.

C. The door hardware supplier shall deliver all individually packaged hardware items in a

timely fashion to the place of installation (Shop or Project Site); direct factory shipments

are not acceptable unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate

delivery times and schedules with the contractor.

D. The General Contractor, door hardware supplier, access control supplier, and installers

shall count, coordinate, and store all door hardware and access control items herein,

verifying complete counts of all items scheduled and furnished. The contractor must






report all shortages (discrepancies with shipping documents) within five (5) working

days. The manufacturers’ and Owner’s representatives will inspect the installation of the

door hardware and access control items during that phase of construction. Any

deficiencies in installation of all materials included herein shall be corrected before

installation continues.

E. The General Contractor shall provide a secure lock-up for the door hardware and security

equipment delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation

of the hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the

work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. All materials must be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a

period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of this project, unless otherwise noted.

Any evidence of misuse or abuse voids all warranties. These warranties shall be each

manufacturers’ standard written warranty.

B. Special Warranties:

1. Continuous Geared Hinges: Life of the Door Opening.

2. Mortise Latchsets and Locksets: Three (3) Year Period.

3. Exit Devices: Three (3) Year Period.

4. Door Closers: Thirty (30) Year Period.

5. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Two (2) Year Period.

6. Saddle Thresholds, Bumper Thresholds, Door Sweeps, Self-Adhesive Gasketing,

Perimeter Seals, Astragal Seals, Self-Adhesive Astragal Gasketing, Mullion Seals,

Interlocking Seals, and Drip Strips: Five (5) Year Period.

C. Any manufacturer whose standard written warranty does not equal or exceed the

requirements listed above must provide a letter stating that they will extend their warranty

to comply with the requirements of this specification.

D. All of the manufacturer’s fasteners and attachments supplied with each hardware item

must be installed to maintain the manufacturer’s fire listing and/or warranty.

E. Refer to Section 01 - Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: General Contractor shall furnish a complete set of

specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for the Owner’s continued

adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUTTS AND HINGES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Ives Bommer Stanley

5BB1 BB5000 FBB179

5BB1 BB5001 FBB191

5BB1HW BB5004 FBB168

5BB1HW BB5005 FBB199

B. Application:

1. Provide NRP (non-removable pins) at out-swinging lockable doors.

C. Quantity:

1. Two hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high.

2. One additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction

thereof.

2.2 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES

A. Acceptable manufacturers:

Ives Stanley Select

224HD 662HD SL24HD

B. Provide electric power transfer (EPT) cutouts, or electric through-wire options as

specified in hardware groups.

2.3 ELECTRIC HINGES


Ives Stanley Select

5BB1 X TW8 BB5060 CEFBB179

B. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of

specified hardware.






C. Locate electric hinges at second hinge from bottom. Where electric hinges are used in

conjunction with exit devices, locate hinge nearest to exit device.

D. Provide mortar guard for each electric hinge specified. Electric hinges shall have a mortar

box fastened to the frame prior to installing the frame in the wall.

2.4 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER


Von Duprin Security Door Controls Securitron

EPT-10 PTM-10 CEPT

B. Provide power transfer sufficient for number and gage of wires to accommodate electric

function of specified hardware.

C. Electric power transfer is to be located per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements,

unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items.

2.5 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUSTPROOF STRIKES


Ives Trimco Burns

FB31P 3810 7842

FB458 3915 590

DP2 3910 545

B. Provide automatic and manual flush bolts with forged bronze face plates, extruded brass

levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch steel or brass rods at

doors up to 90 inches in height. Top rods at manual flush bolts for doors over 90 inches in

height shall be increased by 6 inches for each additional 6 inches of door height. Provide

dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

2.6 LOCKSETS – MORTISE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series:

Schlage Corbin Best

L9000 x 06A ML2000 x Newport 45H x 14H






B. Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with following provisions:

1. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Locksets shall be manufactured from heavy gauge steel, 1/8” minimum lock case

thickness, containing components of steel with a Zinc dichromate plating for

corrosion resistance.

3. Locksets are to have a standard 2 3/4” backset with a full 3/4” throw. Deadbolt

shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.

4. Lock shall be easily handed without opening the lock case.

5. Lock trim shall be through-bolted to door to assure correct alignment a proper

operation.

6. Furnish “Knurled” or “Tactile” outside levers as indicated in the door Hardware

Sets. “Abrasive” outside levers shall not be acceptable.

2.7 Access Control Mortise Locks

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

Schlage

AD-MS

B. Provide access control mortise lock series, type, and function where specified in hardware

groups, with the provisions below.

1. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches.

3. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim

but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where

required, provide open back strike and protected to allow practical and secure

operation.

C. Provide access control products with non-volatile memory.

D. Doors to stairs (other than exit stairs), loading platforms, boiler rooms, stages and doors

serving other hazardous locations shall have knurled or other similar approved marking of

door lever handles or cross bars in accordance with local building codes.

E. Lockset powered by four AA batteries with options for eight AA batteries or a 12V or

24V DC power supply.

F. Lockset shall have ability to communicate battery status.






2.8 EXIT DEVICES


Von Duprin Detex Precision

98/99 Series Advantex Series Apex Series

B. Provide exit device series and functions as specified in Hardware Groups. Von Duprin

product numbers are referenced in the Hardware Groups.

C. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors shall be UL

listed as "Fire Exit Hardware".

D. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lockset levers.

E. Provide lever trim with breakaway feature.

F. Provide cylinders for exit devices with locking trim and cylinder dogging.

G. Provide exit devices with stainless steel touch bars. Load bearing plastic parts are not

acceptable.

H. Provide exit devices with cast metal, flush end caps.

I. Provide deadlocking latchbolt feature for exit devices.

J. Provide roller strikes on all rim exit devices.

2.9 ALUMINUM DOOR DEADLOCKS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

Adams Rite

MS1850S

B. Provide deadlocks and deadlatches for aluminum doors as specified in hardware groups.

C. Provide mortise cylinders of proper length and with proper cam as specified in hardware

groups.

D. Provide manufacturer’s standard strike unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect

trim.






2.10 KEYING

A. Master key or Grand master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified.

Factory masterkey with manufacturer retaining permanent keying records.

B. Provide 6 masterkeys for each masterkey set. Provide 3 change keys for each lock.

Provide 2 control keys for core removal. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

C. Submit proposed keying schedule to Architect. If requested, meet with Owner and

Architect to review schedule.

D. Provide large format removable core cylinders for each lock with temporary keyed brass

construction cores. Permanent Medeco large format interchangeable cores shall be

provided by owner.

2.11 DOOR TRIM

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types:

Ives Trimco Burns

8200 1001-9 56

8303 1018-3B 5426C

9100 1741 422

8190 1191-3 29C

B. Push Plates:

1. Ives type 8200 6 inches by 16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where width of door stile prevents use of 6 inch wide plate, provide push plate one

inch less than width of stile but not less than 4 inches wide.

C. Pull Plates:

1. Ives type 8303 4 inches by 16 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Push Bars:

1. Ives type 9100, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Pulls:

1. Ives Series 8190, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where required, mount back to back with push bars.






F. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: Ives 8400 Series, minimum of 0.050 inch thick, beveled 4

edges unless otherwise indicated. See notes below.

1. At single doors provide width two inches less than door width on stop side and one

inch less than door width on pull side.

2. At pairs of doors provide width one inch less than door width on both sides.

3. Height of 10 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide plates with countersunk screw holes.

2.12 COORDINATORS


Ives Trimco Burns

COR Series 3094 Series 7600 Series

B. Provide Ives COR Series coordinator for labeled pairs of doors equipped with automatic

flush bolts and those with vertical rod/mortise lock fire exit device combinations with

astragals.

C. Provide filler bars for total opening width, closer mounting brackets, carry bars, and

special preparation for top latches where applicable.

2.13 DOOR CLOSERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types of Exposed Closers:

LCN Sargent Corbin

4011 / 4111 281 / 281-P10 DC8200 / DC8210 x A3

B. Closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast

iron cylinder.

C. Provide non-sized closers, continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and

allow for reduced opening force to meet opening force requirements of ANSI A117.1

D. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have

separate adjustment for latch speed, swing speed, and back check.

E. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers)

and where specified to have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe (“CUSH”). Parallel arm

mounted closers shall have “EDA” type arms or, where specified, “CUSH” or “SCUSH”

type arms.






F. Surface closers shall be certified to exceed ten million full load cycles by a recognized

independent testing laboratory.

G. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

H. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of

stairway doors.

I. Provide back-check for closers.

J. Provide hold-open arms where indicated.

K. Provide closers for doors as noted in Hardware Groups and, in addition, provide closers

for labeled doors whether or not specifically noted in group.

L. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC 7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive

pressure tests.

M. Pressure relief valves (PRV’s) shall not be permitted.

2.14 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS


LCN Horton Dorma

9500 Series 4000 Series ED400LE

B. Provide automatic operators as specified in hardware groups. Provide complete with drop

plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

C. Provide wall-mounted actuator switches by the same manufacturer as the operator.

Actuators shall be weather-resistant type at exterior applications.

2.15 OVERHEAD STOPS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

Glynn Johnson Rixson Sargent

90 9 Series 590 Series

B. Provide overhead stops for interior doors equipped with regular arm surface type closer

for doors that open against equipment, casework, sidelights, other objects that would

make wall stops inappropriate.

C. Provide sex bolt attachments for mineral core door application.






2.16 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS


Ives Trimco Door Controls

WS406/407CCV 1270WVP 3211T

FS436 W1211 3310X

B. Provide WS406/407CCV Series wall stop for each door leaf unless otherwise specified,

or where conditions require the use of an overhead stop.

C. Floor or base stops shall be used only where definitely specified or absolutely

unavoidable.

2.17 THRESHOLDS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:

National Guard Reese Zero

425E S425A 8655A

B. Where thresholds are specified in hardware groups, provide 8655A thresholds unless

detailed otherwise.

C. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.

D. Where thresholds occur at openings with one or more mullions, they shall be cut for the

mullions and extended continuously for the entire opening.

2.18 WEATHERSTRIPPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:


Sweeps 201NA 323C 39A

Jambs 700SA 755C 429A

Rain Drips 16A R201C 142A

B. Where weatherstripping is specified in hardware groups, provide 429A unless detailed

otherwise.






C. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weatherstripping being applied to hollow metal frames.

D. Where sweeps are specified in hardware groups, provide 39A unless detailed otherwise.

E. Where rain drips are specified in hardware groups, provide 142A x full frame width,

unless detailed otherwise.

2.19 GASKETING



5050 F-797B 188S

B. Where smoke gasket is specified in hardware groups, provide 188S, unless detailed

otherwise.

C. Provide gaskets for 20-minute doors and doors designated for smoke and draft control.

D. Where frame applied intumescent seals are required by the manufacturer, provide gaskets

that comply with UBC 7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.

2.20 ACCESS CONTROL READER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Types:

Schlage

AptiQ MT11/MT15

B. Requirements: Read Only Multi-technology Contactless reader

1. Access control card readers shall be as manufactured by a global company who is a

recognized leader in the production of access control devices. Card reader

manufactured for non-access control applications shall not be acceptable

2. Multi-technology contactless reader shall read access control data from both 125

kHz and 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards and NFC-compatible. The multi-

technology contactless reader shall be optimally designed for use in access control

applications that require reading both 125 kHz Proximity and 13.56 MHz

contactless smart cards

2.21 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES







Schlage Sentrol

679-05HM 1078W

B. Coordinate door and frame preparations with door and frame suppliers.

C. Switches shall be installed in frame head approximately 4" from latching door edge.

2.22 POWER SUPPLIES


Schlage Electronics Precision Securitron

PS900 Series ELR Series BPS Series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide power supplies, recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the

electrified locking component, for the operation of electrified locks, electrified exit

devices, magnetic locks, electric strikes, and other components requiring a power

supply.

2. Provide the appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for the proper

operation of the electrified locking component and/or components as recommended

by the manufacturer of the electrified locking components with consideration for

each electrified component utilizing the power supply, the location of the power

supply, and the approved wiring diagrams. Locate the power supplies as directed

by the Architect.

3. Provide a power supply that is regulated and filtered 24 VDC, or as required, and

UL class 2 listed.

C. Options: Provide the following options.

1. Provide a power supply, where specified, with the internal capability of charging

optional sealed backup batteries 24 VDC, or as required, in addition to operating

the DC load.

2. Provide sealed batteries for battery back-up at each power supply where specified.

3. Provide keyed power supply cabinet.

4. Provide a power supply complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and

shall be supplied in an enclosure.

5. Provide a power supply with emergency release terminals, where required, that

allow the release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system complete

with fire alarm input for initiating “no delay” exiting mode.






2.23 SILENCERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and types:

Ives Steelcraft Don-Jo

SR64 Q146 1608

B. Provide grey rubber silencers featuring pneumatic design that, once installed, forms an air

pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing.

C. Provide three (3) silencers per hollow metal strike jamb; two (2) per hollow metal double

door head. Omit at doors scheduled to receive perimeter weatherstripping or smoke

gasket.

D. Silencers shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011.

2.24 FASTENERS

A. Including, but not limited to, wood or machine screws, bolts, bolts, nuts, anchors, etc. of

proper type, material, and finish required for installation of hardware.

B. Use phillips head for exposed screws. Do not use aluminum screws to attach hardware.

C. Provide self-tapping (TEC) screws for attachment of sweeps and stop-applied

weatherstripping only.

2.25 TYPICAL FINISHES AND MATERIALS

A. Finishes, unless otherwise specified:

1. Butts: Interior Doors and Inswinging Exterior Doors

a. US26D (BHMA 652) on Steel

2. Continuous Hinges:

a. US28 (BHMA 628) on Aluminum

3. Flush Bolts:

a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

4. Exit Devices:







5. Locks and Latches:


6. Push Plates, Pulls and Push Bars:

a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

7. Coordinators:

a. USP (BHMA 600) on Steel

8. Kick Plates, Armor Plates, and Edge Guards:

a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

9. Overhead Stops and Holders:


10. Closers: Surface mounted.

a. Sprayed Aluminum Lacquer.

11. Miscellaneous Hardware:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper

application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except

as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and, except as

otherwise indicated, by the Architect.

1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute.

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into






surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal,

storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work

specified in the Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes

have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Sets units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Where scheduled, door pulls shall be through-bolted with bolt heads concealed behind

push plates.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds, for exterior and interior doors, in a full bed of butyl-rubber or

polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 -

Joint Sealers.

G. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

H. The hardware installer shall be responsible for installation of all mechanical and

electromechanical hardware items contained within this specification, in accordance with

the manufacturer’s technical installation guidance, and in addition to all applicable code

requirements.

I. The Electrical Sub-Contractor, under Division 26 - Electrical, shall be responsible for

providing and installing all (120 VAC) power source wiring as required for the electrified

locking and access control hardware, equipment, accessories, and power supplies. This

includes quad outlets as required on a dedicated circuit in designated IT /

Telecommunication Room(s) and the related conduit, stud-ins, junction boxes, and

connectors required for the power source delivery and connections. Provide cabling,

conduit, stub-ins, patch cords, fire stop systems, data connectors, junction boxes, and back

boxes for both the electrified locking hardware and access control equipment at each of

the access controlled or monitored openings per plan drawings and specifications. Provide

and install conduit between each of the aforementioned devices and between junction

boxes, power supplies, and access control equipment located on or above each door

opening.

1. At wall mounted remote card readers, provide conduit on the secured side of each

door opening, at 48” from above the finished floor and 6” from the edge of each

door frame, to the related power supplies and access control equipment; unless

otherwise instructed by Architect.

2. At all electrical hardware power transfer items provide conduit on the secured side

of each door opening, from the power transfer items, through-wire hinges, or

serviceable panel locations, inside of frame’s jambs, to the related power supplies

and access control equipment.






3. Installation of power supplies and interfacing of security system with fire alarm

system as required, and coordination of complete security system shall be provided

by the Electrical Sub-Contractor, under the Division 26 - Electrical. Electrical Sub-

Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all 120 VAC cabling

connections and terminations from the electrical junction boxes to these electrical

devices.

J. The Access Control System’s supplier shall be responsible for providing all low-voltage

(12 / 24 VDC) wiring and communication cabling (RS-232 / RS-485) installation from

network control processors to reader controllers, I / O monitor / control interface panels,

electrified and integrated locking hardware, remote card readers, keypads, or display

terminals, monitoring and signaling switches, and power supplies, identification, and

termination in accordance with the manufacturer’s technical installation guidance, in

addition to all applicable code requirements. Installation of all card readers, controllers,

software packages, door position switches, and run low voltage wiring from the power

supplies / controllers to the electrified hardware items at each opening where specified.

The Access Control System’s installer shall also be responsible for connectors, final wire

terminations, final hook-ups, testing, system set-up, warranty, and Owner Turnover.

Owner Training shall be provided under this Section.

K. Upon completion of the final installation of the Door Hardware and Access Control

System, and burn in of the Security System, the Contract Hardware Distributor and the

Access Control System’s Supplier shall jointly make final adjustments to the electrified

hardware and Access Control System’s openings to insure proper adjustment and function

of the opening is in compliance with the system’s functionality requirements.


A. After installation has been completed, provide services of qualified hardware consultant

to check Project to determine proper application of finish hardware according to schedule.

Also check operation and adjustment of hardware items.

B. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating

equipment.


A. At final completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make final

adjustment to door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found

defective repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

B. Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility

Standards.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to

acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance






or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or

area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware

and doors.

D. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and

hardware finishes.

E. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide for proper protection of items of hardware until Owner accepts Project as

complete.

3.6 HARDWARE GROUPS

A. The following schedule of hardware groups shall be considered a guide only, and the

supplier is cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the preamble

to this section. It shall be the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required

hardware.

B. Refer to the door schedule for hardware group required at each door opening.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A121 A122 B117 B118A B118B B119

B120 B121 B122 B123 B124 B126

B127 B128 B129 B130

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050L 06A L583-363 626 SCH

1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED

1 EA PERMANENT CORE FURNISHED BY OWNER 626 MED

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

1 EA COAT AND HAT

HOOK

582 626 IVE

3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE







FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A108 A109 A110 B104A B107 B114

B133A B133B


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070L 06A 626 SCH






FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A102 A103 B112 B113 B138 B139


3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 6" X 16" 630 IVE

1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 4" X 16" 630 IVE

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE

1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE




FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B150A


2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE






1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE

1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM

LOCK

AD-300-MS-70-MT-RHO-JDYA6 626 SCE



1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY




1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 LGR SCE


FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A112 B135


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L 06A 626 SCH








FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B104B B145D


1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD EPT 628 IVE

1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON

1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM

LOCK



1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN

1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER






1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 AL ZER


1 SET WIRING DIAGRAMS AS REQUIRED

1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME

MANUFACTURER

COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL AND SECURITY SYSTEMS.

ENTRY BY CARD READER OR KEY OVERRIDE WILL UNLOCK DOOR.

REQUEST TO EXIT AND DOOR POSITION SWITCH CONNECTED TO ACCESS CONTROL

SYSTEM FOR MONITORING.

DOOR IS ALWAYS AVAILABLE FOR FREE EGRESS.


FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B107 B115 B134A B134B


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-L-06 626 VON

1 EA RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED


1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN




FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A101 B101 B103 B136

PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR



1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-9949-EO 626 VON






1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-QEL+-9949-NL-OP-110MD 626 VON



2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 10" O 630 IVE


1 EA SURF. AUTO

OPERATOR

9542 MS ANCLR LCN

1 EA ACTUATOR PKG

WALL MT

8310-3857TW 630 LCN




1 EA MULTITECH READER MT11 BLK SCE

2 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM BLK SCE

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4RL LGR SCE



MANUFACTURER

COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL AND SECURITY.

ENTRY BY CARD READER OR KEY OVERRIDE WILL UNLOCK DOOR. VALID

CREDENTIAL WILL ALLOW ADA WALL ACTUATOR TO BE USED AND SIGNAL AUTO

OPERATOR TO OPEN DOOR.



DOOR ALWAYS AVAILABLE FOR FREE EGRESS.


FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A114C A116B A117B A117C B141

B142A B142B B143A B143B B144A B144B

B145C B146B B150B

PROVIDE EACH RU DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR



1 HARDWARE BY DOOR

MANUFACTURER






SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 08 3300 FOR MANUFACTURER'S HARDWARE.


FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A114A A115




1 EA KEYED REMOVABLE

MULLION

KR4954 689 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-99-EO 626 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE












1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4RL LGR SCE



MANUFACTURER












FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A117A


6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE

1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM

LOCK

















FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B102


1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED MED




HARDWARE BY DOOR

MANUFACTURER







ENTRY BY CARD OR KEY OVERRIDE.

COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL AND SECURITY SYSTEMS.






1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-9927-EO 626 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-QEL+-9927-NL-OP-LBR-110MD 626 VON








1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS LGR SCE








FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B131A B132A
















FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A124 A125 A126


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE






HARDWARE GROUP NO. 16 - 80 CLSR WS



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE







1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER









3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE









FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A114E A116A



1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9927-EO-LBR 626 VON

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9927-L-LBR-06 626 VON








FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A123







3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 06A L583-363 626 SCH







3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE








FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A107 B147


6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT

FB458 626 IVE












FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B145A B145B


6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT

FB458 626 IVE






2 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE

PROVIDE FLOOR STOP WHERE




3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE







FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B137B


2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE






1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE

1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM

LOCK


















3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 06A 626 SCH




FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B131B B132B








2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT

FB458 626 IVE





2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 HEDA 689 LCN




FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B150C


6 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE


1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE


1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-QEL+-9975-NL-L/TRIM 626 VON



2 EA FLUSH PULL BF97 630 ROC

1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE




1 EA GASKETING 429A A ZER

1 EA ASTRAGAL 328AA AA ZER

2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A A ZER





ENTRY BY CARD OR KEY OVERRIDE. DOOR ALWAYS AVAILABLE FOR FREE EGRESS.








FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A104


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 5 X 4.5 652 IVE










FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A105B



2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT

FB458 626 IVE






2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH 689 LCN











FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B148B






1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH 689 LCN










1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE

RX-9949-EO 626 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE














MANUFACTURER















2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT

FB458 626 IVE












FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A106A A114D A116C B105 B108A B108B

PROVIDE EACH CO DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA CASED OPENING NO HARDWARE










1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9927-EO-LBR 626 VON

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9927-L-LBR-06 626 VON










1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-L-NL-06 626 VON










FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A120C


1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE

1 EA DEADBOLT MS1850S 628 ADA

1 EA THUMB TURN

CYLINDER

4066 628 ADA








1 SET PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-10"-NO 630 IVE






MANUFACTURER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 37 - CLASS OH

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): B111A B111B


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE







FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A118 B106A




HARDWARE BY DOOR

MANUFACTURER




















2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-9949-EO 626 VON

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-9949-NL-OP-110MD 626 VON






1 EA SURF. AUTO

OPERATOR

9542 MS ANCLR LCN

1 EA ACTUATOR PKG

WALL MT

8310-3857TW 630 LCN






MANUFACTURER

COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL.

ENTRY BY KEY. DOORS MAY BE DOGGED DOWN. PRESSING ACTUATOR WILL SIGNAL






AUTO OPERATOR TO OPEN DOOR.



FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): A114B B106B




HARDWARE BY DOOR

MANUFACTURER







GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows doors interior borrowed lites storefront framing and skylights.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.


1. Section 084113 "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefront".

2. Section 088853 "Security Glazing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined

in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.


D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge

and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.







GLAZING 088000 - 2





C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12

inches square.

1. Tinted glass.

2. Insulating glass.

D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths.

E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For tinted glass insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant

formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project

who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according

to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.






GLAZING 088000 - 3


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage

to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to

sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing

units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and

when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to

glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's

written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing

vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass

standard.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed

to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's

written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or

film on interior surfaces of glass.






GLAZING 088000 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following]:

1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.

2. Cardinal Glass Industries.

3. Cristacurva.

4. Dlubak Corporation.

5. Gardner Glass, Inc.

6. GGI; General Glass International.

7. Glasswerks LA, Inc.

8. GTI; Glaz-Tech Industries.

9. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard.

10. Hartung Glass Industries.

11. JE Berkowitz, LP.

12. Northwestern Industries, Inc.

13. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.

14. Pilkington North America.

15. PPG Flat Glass; PPG Industries, Inc.

16. Schott North America, Inc.

17. Tecnoglass.

18. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.

19. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

20. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each

glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage

attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of

sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or

other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design glazing.


























GLAZING 088000 - 5

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness

indicated.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for

overall unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in

referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with

certification label of manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,

thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-

strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with

"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated,

provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with

"Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide

fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.





GLAZING 088000 - 6

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A

(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as

indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. All tempered glass to be safety glass and meet requirements per VCC 2406

D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2

(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated

by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary

sealants.

2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,

including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel

substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions

existing at time of installation.






whichever is less.







GLAZING 088000 - 7

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for

application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in

installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus

or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size

and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and

face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions

of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system

performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting

on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square

edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with

the following:





GLAZING 088000 - 8

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before

glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed

so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave

visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass

from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with

edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair

performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or

gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when

installation is subjected to movement.

G. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended

by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt

joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.





GLAZING 088000 - 9


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other

masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,

for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for

inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in

writing by glass manufacturer.

3.5 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4" unless otherwise indicated.

2. Safety glazing required.

B. Glass Type GL-2: Ceramic-coated spandrel glass; fully tempered float glass.

1. Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Minimum Thickness: 1 inch.

3. Coating Location: Second surface.

4. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum.

5. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .27 maximum.

6. Fallout Resistance: Passes fallout-resistance test in ASTM C 1048 for an assembly of

glass and adhered reinforcing material.

3.6 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-3: Low-E-coated, tinted insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch.

3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted float glass.

4. Tint Color: Gray.

5. Interspace Content: Air.

6. Indoor Lite: Clear annealed float glass.





GLAZING 088000 - 10

7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum.

8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum.

9. Visible Light Transmittance: 64 percent minimum.

10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .40 maximum.

11. Safety glazing required.

3.7 MONOLITHIC ACRYLIC SECURITY GLAZING SCHEUDLE

A. Refer to Specification Section 088853 "Security Glazing" for Type SG-1.







SECURITY GLAZING 088853 - 1

SECTION 088853 - SECURITY GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes monolithic acrylic for the following applications:

1. Windows

2. Doors.

3. Interior borrowed lites.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glazing Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, monolithic plastic glazing, or

fabricated security glazing, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Interspace: Space between lites of air-gap security glazing or insulating security glazing.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on security glazing,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable

tolerances.







C. Security Glazing Samples: For each type of security glazing; 12 inches square.







D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For security glazing indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating security glazing with sputter-

coated, low-e coatings glazing testing agency and sealant testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of security glazing, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

D. Product Test Reports: For each type of glazing sealant, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

1. Provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-

month period.

E. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test reports.

F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glazing installers for this Project

who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program.

B. Security Glazing Testing Agency Qualifications: Subject to compliance with requirements,

testing agency is one of the following:

1. H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

3. Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Inc.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing

indicated.


A. Protect security glazing and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Prevent damage from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to

sun, or other causes.







A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and

when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Polycarbonate Sheet: Manufacturer agrees to replace

polycarbonate sheet that deteriorates within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

polycarbonate sheet is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed

to maintaining and cleaning polycarbonate sheet contrary to manufacturer's written

instructions. Defects include yellowing and loss of light transmission.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Security Glazing: Obtain security glazing from single source from

single manufacturer using the same types of lites, plies, interlayers, and spacers for each

security glazing type indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Sealants and Gaskets: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General:

1. Installed security glazing shall withstand security-related loads and forces without

damage to the glazing beyond that allowed by referenced standards.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design security glazing.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.






2.3 SECURITY GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of security glazing and

glazing material manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements

are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this

Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing

Manual."

B. Plastic Glazing Labeling: Identify plastic sheets with appropriate markings of applicable

testing and inspecting agency, indicating compliance with required fire-test-response

characteristics.

C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with

certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's

name, type of glazing, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glazing

complies.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Polycarbonate Sheets: As determined by testing

polycarbonate sheets identical to those used in security glazing products by a qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Self-ignition temperature of 650 deg F or more when tested according to

ASTM D 1929 on plastic sheets in thicknesses indicated for the Work.

2. Smoke-Developed Index of 450 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, or

smoke density of 75 or less when tested according to ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets

in thicknesses indicated for the Work.

3. Burning extent of 1 inch or less when tested according to ASTM D 635 at a nominal

thickness of 0.060 inch or thickness indicated for the Work.

2.4 POLYCARBONATE SECURITY GLAZING

A. Polycarbonate Sheet: ASTM C 1349, Appendix X1, Type II, coated, mar-resistant, UV-

stabilized polycarbonate with coating on exposed surfaces and Type I, standard, UV-

stabilized polycarbonate where no surfaces are exposed.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and

with other materials they contact, including security glazing, seals of insulating

security glazing and air-gap security glazing, and glazing channel substrates, under






conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based

on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and security glazing manufacturers' written

instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for

conditions existing at time of installation.






whichever is less.

5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range.

B. Security Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, nonsag, tamper-resistant sealant for joints with

low movement complying with ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12.5 or 25, Use NT, and

with a Shore A hardness of at least 45 when tested according to ASTM C 661.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids

elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or

without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and security glazing manufacturers

for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products

indicated below:

1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with

adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary

sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination

with a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of security glazing and other glazing materials for

application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in

installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.








C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus

or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by security

glazing manufacturer to maintain security glazing lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit security glazing lateral

movement (side walking).

2.8 FABRICATION OF SECURITY GLAZING

A. Fabricate security glazing in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge

and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written

instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with

system performance requirements.

B. Grind smooth and polish exposed security glazing edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing for security glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.

4. Minimum required bite.

5. Effective sealing between joints of framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving security glazing immediately

before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed

so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will

leave visible marks in the completed work.






3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of security glazing, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated,

including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect edges of security glazing from damage during handling and installation. Remove

damaged security glazing from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged

security glazing includes units with edge or face damage or other imperfections that, when

installed, could weaken security glazing and impair performance and appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications unless otherwise required by glazing unit manufacturer. Set blocks in thin

course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by security glazing manufacturers for installing

lites.

F. Provide spacers for security glazing lites where the length plus width is larger than 50

inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of

security glazing. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances

unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain

required face clearances and to comply with performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glazing lites and use thickness equal to

sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed

thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent security glazing from moving

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer

and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set security glazing in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar

characteristics.

I. Set coated security glazing with proper orientation so that coatings and films face exterior

or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or

gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when

installation is subjected to movement.






K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended

by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt

joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by security glazing, their exposed

edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes

to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.

Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not

lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Center security glazing in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by

inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of

removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between

security glazing and glazing stops to maintain face clearances and to prevent sealant from

extruding into glazing channel and blocking weep systems. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge

clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or

bond of sealant to security glazing and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial washaway from security glazing.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect security glazing from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations, including weld splatter. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or






below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during

construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or

stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with

security glazing, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by

security glazing manufacturer. Remove and replace security glazing that cannot be

cleaned without damage.

C. Wash security glazing on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four

days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.

Wash security glazing as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer.

3.7 MONOLITHIC ACRYLIC SECURITY GLAZING SCHEUDLE

A. Security Glazing Type SG-1: Monolithic acrylic with mar-resistant and UV resistant

coating on both surfaces.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1.25".

2. Weight: 7.7 psf unless otherwise recommended by bullet proof glazing

manufacturer.

3. Light Transmission: 90%.

4. Yellowness Index: < 0.7%.

5. Abrasion Resistance 0.2 to 2.0.

6. Ballistic Resistance: Level 1.






NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing

and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists;

and roof trusses.







A. Evaluation Reports: For embossed steel studs and tracks, from ICC-ES or other qualified








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of


B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: Hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

C. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs

and tracks.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface

deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent

to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of

studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.







1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound

transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-

inch-wide flanges.


2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in

diameter.

C. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal

thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.



A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding

power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal

frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other




A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy

trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at

exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions

above ceiling.






1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of

finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;

install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-

inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in

finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of

overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as

required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of

openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.

5. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to

arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs

6 inches o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more

than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:






1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective

means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard

suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers

in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to

inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by

attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and

appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to

deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms.

6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

7. Do not attach hangers to existing cementitious wood fiber deck.






GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.






Product Certificates: For indigenous materials, indicating location of material manufacturer

and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance

to Project, means of transportation, and cost for each indigenous material.

Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content.

4. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives and sealants, indicating compliance with


Laboratory Test Reports: For ceiling and wall materials, indicating compliance with



A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic

effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.










1. Install mockup in a location determined by the Architect.

2. Apply final paint finish indicated on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.




A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage.

Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and

conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Ceiling and wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of


Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde

emissions shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content

not less than 25 percent.

Indigenous Materials: Products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site

from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,









within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If materials are transported by rail or water, the

distance transported by rail or water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to determine the distance to

Project site.

C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area

and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


the following:

a. American Gypsum.

b. CertainTeed Corporation.

c. Continental Building Products, LLC.

d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

e. National Gypsum Company.

f. PABCO Gypsum.

g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.

h. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to

be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.



C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



D. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board, tested according

to ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.

1. Type FRX-G (By USG) or equal product from listed manufacturer.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.


4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
















2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

c. Expansion (control) joint.

d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface

areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or

high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to

be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and


B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.






2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,

slag wool, or rock wool.

Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled


D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission

through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing

representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


the following:

a. Accumetric LLC.: Boss 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.

b. Grabber Construction Products: Acoustical Sealant GSC.

c. Pecora Corporation: AC-20 FTR or A15-919.






whichever is less.

E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing,

with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting


B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.














3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to

avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of

adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends

with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place

tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of

partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above

ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural

members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge

trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural

surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached

to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical

sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with

ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and

closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions

above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are

readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.






3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. Generally all walls and vertical

surfaces above 8'-0" above finish floor.

2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.

3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

4. Abuse-Resistant Type: Generally all walls and vertical surfaces exposed to view

below 8'-0" above finished floor refer to partition types on drawings for additional

information.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end

joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate

courses of panels.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent

possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves

and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.

Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with

screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to

ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.






2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces

for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as

not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 5: At all locations where gypsum board is exposed to view.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and

other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during

drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.






CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile.

2. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units or glass-mat, water-

resistant backer board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in

ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,

ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its

"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.












C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details,

and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and

finished tile surfaces.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish

required

2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.



B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile

manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed

and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels

describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount

installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,

composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a

Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.

2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman

Certification.







3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers

recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels

intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile

packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry

location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source

or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of

consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform

quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each

aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and

aggregate, from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in

this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Metal edge strips.






2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,

compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards

referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other

requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and

package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type PR1, 2, 3: Glazed porcelain tile.


the following:

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.

b. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation.

c. Crossville, Inc.

d. Daltile, Basis-of-Design product.

e. Florida Tile, Inc.

f. Florim USA.

g. Grupo Porcelanite.

h. Interceramic.

i. Iris US.

j. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.

3. Face Size: 6-1/2 inches by 20 inches.

4. Face Size Variation: Rectified.


6. Face: Plain with square edges. As indicated on drawings.

7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.

8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the

drawings.

9. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

















2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.


the following:

a. ARDEX Americas.

b. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.

c. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.

d. Bostik, Inc.

e. C-Cure.

f. Custom Building Products.

g. Jamo Inc.

h. Laticrete International, Inc.

i. MAPEI Corporation.

j. Merkrete by Parex USA, Inc.

k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

l. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

m. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or

acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS, GR1

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.


the following:

a. ARDEX Americas.

b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.

c. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.

d. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.

e. Bostik, Inc.

f. C-Cure.

g. Custom Building Products.

h. Jamo Inc.

i. Laticrete International, Inc.

j. MAPEI Corporation.

k. Merkrete by Parex USA, Inc.

l. Sauereisen.

m. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

n. Summitville Tiles, Inc.



































o. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc., Basis-of-Design product

2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to

temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer

for intended use.

3. Color: From manufacturer’s standard range. Color as indicated on drawings.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-

based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for

installations indicated.

B. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Radius profile, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic

designed specifically for wall (outside corner) applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666,

300 Series exposed-edge material.


the following:

a. Blanke Corporation.

b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.

c. Manhattan American Terrazzo Strip Co.

d. Schluter Systems L.P., Basis-of-Design product.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile

and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and

grout manufacturers.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout


B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,

and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum

performance characteristics for installations indicated.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present,

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting


1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other

substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness

tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and

mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been

completed.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations;

if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile walls installed with

adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically

recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken

from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for

TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the

ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in

TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of

setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Interior wall tiles.

b. Wall tiles consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.

c. Wall tiles consisting of rib-backed tiles.






B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without

marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in

items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and

other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile

edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles

are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and

center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to

minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths


1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints

within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same

size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles

on base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Tile: 3/16 inch.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install where wall tile wraps corners to conceal exposed edges of tile and

to protect corners.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new

matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.






B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they

are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's

written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners

recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that

cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned.

Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces

with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction

period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply

coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is

completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner

from tile surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W202; thinset mortar.

a. Ceramic Tile Type.

b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar.

c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.






ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1

SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical ceiling tiles for interior ceilings.

2. Fully concealed and/or partially exposed, direct-hung, suspension systems.


1. Section 095423 “Linear Plank Panels and Mesh Panel Ceilings” for ceilings

consisting of metal panels and fully concealed or partially exposed suspension

systems.

2. Section 092000 “Plaster and Gypsum Board”

3. Divisions 23 – HVAC Air Distribution

4. Division 26 - Electrical

C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other

ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Continuous Wall-to-Wall.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit

and suspension system required.

B. Samples for Verification: For each exposed product and for each color and texture

specified, 6 inches in size, 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension

system including main runner and four foot cross tees, seismic clips full size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.






D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.

3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment

devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where

conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.

5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Diffusers.

c. Grilles.

d. Speakers.

e. Sprinklers.

f. Access panels.

g. Perimeter moldings.

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles.

8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

B. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified

requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and

standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved

independent laboratory classification of NRL, CAL, and AL.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

E. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and

fastener type, from ICC-ES.






F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Underwriter’s laboratory classification of acoustical performance to be included on every

carton.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that

are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed

component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a


1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying

with ASTM E 1264 Classification.

3. Fire Resistance: As follows tested per ASTM E119 and listed in the appropriate floor

or roof design in the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory

B. Acoustical Panels: As with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct

or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or

accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a

fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a

fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire

detection and suppression systems are present.

C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work

including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical

systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.







A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and

store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against

damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface

contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized

moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any

way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed

and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,

and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for

Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before

beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to

repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not


1. 1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping

2. 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects

B. B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.

2. Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.

3. Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max

performance supplied by one source manufacturer is Thirty (30) years from date of

substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with

other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its

suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing

agency.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES ACT1



following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Basis-of-Design product.

2. CertainTeed Corporation.

3. United States Gypsum Company.

B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern,

acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.

C. Acceptable Product: Armstrong, Clean Room VL, 868, or equal.

D. Classification: Provide Clean Room class 100 tiles as follows:











1. Type and Form: Mineral fiber, wet-formed, Type IV, form 2, Pattern: E.

2. Surface Finish: Vinyl-faced membrane.

3. Pattern: No pattern; smooth texture (G), unperforated panel.

E. Color: White as indicated on Drawings.

F. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.80.

G. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 40.

H. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than N/A.

I. Edge/Joint Detail: Square, lay-in.

J. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

K. Modular Size: 24” x 24”.

L. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial

formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative

bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to

ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274

or ASTM G 21, BioBlock (or equal)

M. Humidity Resistance: HumiGuard Plus, or equal.

N. Insulation Value: R Factor-BTU: 1-5; R-Factor – Watts: 0.26.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL TILES ACT 2


products that may be incorporated into the work include but are not limited to the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: Basis-of-Design product.

2. CertainTeed Corporation.

3. United State Gypsum Company.

B. Acceptable Product: Armstrong, Cirrus High-NRL, 556 (or equal)

C. Classification as follows:

1. Type and Form: Mineral Fiber, wet-formed Type III, Form 1, Pattern EIC

2. Surface Finish: Factory Applied Latex Paint

3. Pattern: No pattern, Fine Texture, Panel.

D. Color: White, as indicated on Drawings.

E. Light Reflectance: Not less than 0.85.






F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.

G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.75.

H. Aviation class (AC: Not less than 170.

I. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular, 15/16 in for interface with Prelude XL 15/16 in

exposed tee grid.

J. Thickness: 7/8 in.

K. Modular Size: 24” x 24”.

L. Antimicrobial Treatment: BioBlock+ (or equal).

M. Humidity Resistance: HumiGuard Plus, or equal.

N. Insulation Value: R Factor – BTU: 2.3; R Factor – Watts: 0.40.

O. Recycle Content: Post-Consumer – 0% Pre-consumer Waster – 73%

P. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL)

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Components: Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from

commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams

and cross tees are double-web steel construction with exposed flange design. Exposed

surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint.

Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty

2. Color: Silver Satin and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted

otherwise.

3. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong

World Industries

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,

Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield

stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to

which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and

anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other


B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture

damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Testing Substrates: Before adhesively bonding tiles to wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-

place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's

recommended limits.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless

otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

C. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. Follow manufacturer installation instructions.

B. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and

in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center

along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight.

D. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter

corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

E. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and

vertical surfaces.






F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on

flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces.

Support edges by wall moldings.


A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12

feet, non-cumulative.

B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension

system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Replace damaged and broken panels.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of

minor finish damage. Remove any ceiling products that cannot be successfully cleaned and

or repaired. Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage.

C. Before disposing of ceilings, contact the Armstrong Recycling Center at 877-276-7876,

select option #1 then #8 to review with a consultant the condition and location of building

where the ceilings will be removed. The consultant will verify the condition of the material

and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling. The Armstrong consultant with

provide assistance to facilitate the recycle of the ceiling.






LINEAR PLANK PANELS AND MESH PANEL CEILINGS 095423 - 1

SECTION 095423 - LINEAR PLANK PANELS AND MESH PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Acoustical metal ceiling planks

2. Decorative mesh ceiling panels

3. Exposed grid suspension system

4. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings

5. Perimeter and decorative soffit trim


1. Section 095123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings

2. Section 092000 (09250) - Plaster and Gypsum Board

3. Divisions 23 - HVAC Air Distribution

4. Division 26 - Electrical

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LR: Light Reflectance Coefficient.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of linear metal planks or mesh panels (ACT 3 and ACT

4) and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by

them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, partition

assemblies, and access panels.


A. SAPC3: Continuous/wall-to-wall.






B. SAPC4: Accent soffits, continuous infill.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of metal ceiling unit and

suspension system required.




C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color and other

decorative finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish

required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Linear Metal Pan (ACT 3): Set of 12-inch-long Samples of each type and color and a

12-inch-long spliced section.

2. Mesh Panel (ACT 4): 12 inch long sample of each type and color.

3. Suspension System Members: 12-inch-long Sample of each type.

4. Exposed Molding and Trim: Set of 12-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and

color.

5. Filler Strips: Set of 12-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color.

6. Sound Absorber: 12 inches long.

7. End Cap: Full size.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of seismic restraints and attachment devices.




involved:

1. Mesh panels.

2. Linear plank panels.

3. Joint pattern.

4. Ceiling suspension members.

5. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment

devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.







6. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

and access panels.

7. Ceiling perimeter and penetrations through ceiling; trim and moldings.

8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For linear metal ceiling (ACT 3) and mesh ceiling panel (ACT 4), for

tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For linear metal ceiling, mesh ceiling panels and components, and

anchor and fastener type.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Underwriter’s laboratory classification of acoustical performance to be included on every

carton.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Linear Plank Panels and Mesh Panel Ceilings: Quantity of each plank, tile, carrier,

accessory, and exposed molding and trim equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a


B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate

markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying

with ASTM E 1264 Classification.

C. Acoustic Panels: Panels or Planks may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water

distribution pattern to possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire

detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device.

Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their






local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are

present.

D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work

including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical

systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.


A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them

in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a

stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any

way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install linear metal ceilings or mesh panels until spaces

are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings

is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels

indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Building areas to receive ceilings

shall be free of construction dust and debris.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Metal Ceiling Plank or Mesh Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the

manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Metal Planks and Mesh Panels: Sagging and warping

2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects

B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical Metal panels: One (1) year from date of substantial completion

2. Grid: One (1) year from date of substantial completion

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with

other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PLANK CEILING PANEL (ACT 3)

a. Surface Texture: Smooth

b. Surface Finish: Powder-coated, post-production painted finish.

c. Composition: Metal, formed. Plank.

d. Color: Silver Grey

e. Size: 6IN x 96IN x 5/8” thk.

f. Edge Profile: Square

g. Perforation Option: Round – No pattern Microperforated M2

h. Noise Reduction Coefficient( NRC): .07 according to ASTM C 423; Classified

with UL label on product carton

i. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A

j. Light Reflectance White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.61

k. Dimensional Stability: Standard

l. Acceptable Product: MetalWorks Linear, 7161 as manufactured by Armstrong

World Industries, or equal.

2. Infill Metal Panel Accessories:

a. Accessibility Panels: 24”x24” with hairline seams, access in upward direction.

b. Light trim as required (to match plank width).

2.2 METAL MESH CEILING PANELS, ACT 4.

a. Surface Texture: Smooth

b. Surface finish: Powder-coated, post-production painted finish.

c. Composition: Metal, pattern-squares. Panel.

d. Color: Silver Grey

e. Size: 24IN x 24IN x ¼” thk.

f. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In for interface with Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed

Tee grid.

g. Perforation Option: Open Mesh, 1cell (welded)

h. Noise Reduction Coefficient( NRC): N/A

i. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : N/A

j. Sabin: N/A

k. Articulation Class (AC): N/A

l. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Non-Combustible

m. Light Reflectance White Panel: N/A

n. Dimensional Stability: Standard

o. Recycled Content: Post-Consumer - 0% Pre-Consumer Waste - 25%

p. Acceptable Product: MetalWorks Mesh - Welded Wire, 1Cell 6131AM as

manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, or equal.

2. Infill Metal Panel Accessories






2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Components

1. Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial

quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and

cross tees are double-web steel construction with exposed flange design. Exposed

surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester

paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty

b. Color: Silver Grey and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile,

unless noted otherwise

c. Recycled Content: Post-Consumer - 23% Pre-Consumer - 7%

d. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by

Armstrong World Industries, or equal.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,

Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield

stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to

which linear metal ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and

anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of linear metal ceilings.

B. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and

painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by

manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings).

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of linear metal pans to balance border widths

at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width pans at borders, and

comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans and on Coordination Drawings.






3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer recommended installation instructions.

B. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and

in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter

corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

D. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and

vertical surfaces.

E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on



F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on




A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special

inspections:

1. Suspended ceiling system.

2. Hangers, anchors, and fasteners.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of linear metal

ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of

extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of linear metal

ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations

show compliance with requirements.

1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each

floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.

a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power-actuated

fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will

test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select 1 of every 2 postinstalled

anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf

of tension.






b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with

requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until

20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

D. Linear metal ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they

do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Replace damaged and broken panels.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension

members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor

finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired

to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.






RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

2. Resilient molding accessories.







3. Laboratory Test Reports: For resilient base and molding accessories, indicating

compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and

pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

Include samples of each molding for each type of flooring transition.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings.




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of

each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.









A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,

with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not

less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less

than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the

following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within

range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Resilient base and molding accessories shall comply with the requirements of the California



Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.

2.2 RESILIENT BASE (RB1, RB2)


following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.

3. Flexco.

4. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company, Basis-of-Design product.

5. Roppe Corporation, USA.

6. VPI Corporation.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).













1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring (STV1, RT1) and carpet

(CPT1, 2), where applicable.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length lengths 48 inches long or coils in

manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

2.3 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY TS3, TS8


following:


2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.

3. Flexco.

4. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company, Basis-of-Design product.

5. Musson Rubber Co.

6. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Description: Vinyl carpet edge for glue-down applications, reducer strip for resilient

flooring, joiner for tile (STV1/RT1) and carpet and transition strips in profiles and

dimensions appropriate for flooring transitions, as indicated on the drawings.

C. Locations: Provide vinyl molding accessories in areas indicated.

D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.













B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for

resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California




whichever is less.

C. Metal Edge Strips (TS8): Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height

required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to

minimize running joints.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient

stair-tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,

scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according

to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended

by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.








3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.

Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale

recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing

according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the

following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed

with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission

rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent

relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they

are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by

resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and

other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:






1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with

returns not less than 6 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with

returns not less than 6 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would

otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient

products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product

installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from

construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of

construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.






RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rubber tile.

2. Solid vinyl floor tile.

3. Vinyl composition floor tile.

4. Transition strips (resilient and metal).







3. Product Data: For chemical-bonding compounds, indicating VOC content.

4. Laboratory Test Reports: For chemical-bonding compounds, indicating compliance

with requirements for low-emitting materials.




7. Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with


C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,

doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

D. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.










F. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,

color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming

method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified

by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less

than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less

than 70 deg F or more than 80 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following

time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.






B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within

range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 80 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of


Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde

emissions shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.

2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE SVT1


following:

1. Altro Group.

2. American Biltrite.


4. Congoleum Corporation.

5. Ecomoso, Centiva Vinyl Flooring.

6. Gerflor.

7. IVC US.

8. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

9. Mannington Mills, Inc.

10. Polyflor, Ltd.; distributed by Gerbert Limited.

11. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

12. TOLI International.

13. VPI Corporation.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile.





















2. Type: B, embossed surface.

C. Thickness: 0.120 inch.

D. Size: 6 by 36 inches plank.

E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

2.3 RUBBER FLOOR TILE RT1


following:


2. Flexco.

3. Johnsonite, Basis-of-Design Product, defiant oil and grease resistant tile.


5. Nora Systems, Inc.

6. PRF USA, Inc.

7. Roppe Corporation.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class 1-A and 1-B, homogeneous 100% synthetic rubber tile,

solid through-speckle color.

C. Hardness: Not less than 80 as required by ASTM F1344. Shore, Type A durometer per

ASTM D2240.

D. Wearing Surface: Hammered.

1. Molded-Pattern Figure: Speckled.

E. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

F. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

G. Seamless Installation Method: Per manufacturer’s recommended instructions.

H. Colors and Patterns: Manufacturer’s full range of colors, as noted on drawings.

I. Warranty: 5-year minimum.

2.4 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE VCT1 and 2


following:












2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Basis-of-Design Product.

3. Congoleum Corporation.


B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: Manufacturer’s full range of colors, as noted on drawings.

2.5 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY (TS3, 8)


following:


2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.

3. Flexco.

4. Johnsonite, Basis-of-Design Product.

5. Musson Rubber Company.

6. Roppe Corporation.

B. Vinyl transition, reducer strip for resilient flooring; joiner and transition strips in profiles

and dimensions appropriate for flooring transitions, as indicated on drawings.

C. Locations: Provide molding accessories in areas indicated.

D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations on drawings.

2.6 METAL EDGE STRIPS (TS6, 9)

A. Extruded metal with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge

of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

2.7 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to

suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.















whichever is less.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,

scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended

by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile

manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within

range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or

more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing

according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent

than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed

with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission

rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.








b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent

relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to

be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by

resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor

offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid

using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated on drawings.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence

as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or

deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent

fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor

tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future

cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent

marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint

covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and

pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile

edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.






H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate

to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at

joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction

period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying

liquid floor polish according to manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.






RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 096623 - 1

SECTION 096623 - RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thin-set, epoxy-resin terrazzo flooring and base.

2. Precast epoxy-resin terrazzo units.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with terrazzo.

2. Section 096723 "Resinous Flooring" for decorative resinous flooring systems applied as

self-leveling slurries or as troweled or screeded mortars.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Aggregate: Marble chips, Mother of Pearl, and recycled glass chips.



1. Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the

following:

a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed

by other trades.

b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,


delays.

c. Review special terrazzo designs and patterns.

d. Review moisture testing of concrete.

e. Review applications of crack isolation membrane and adhesive primer.









1. Product Data for IgCC Section 503.2: For products having recycled content,


recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled

content.

2. Product Data for IgCC Section 806.2: For adhesives, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for IgCC Section 806.2: For sealers, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content.

4. Laboratory Test Reports for IgCC Section 806.1: For adhesives, documentation

indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the



Environmental Chambers."

5. Laboratory Test Reports for IgCC Section 806.1: For flooring system, including sealers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements



Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, sections, component

details, and relationship to other work. Show layout of the following:

1. Divider strips.

2. Control-joint strips.

3. Accessory strips.

4. Abrasive strips.

5. Stair treads, risers, and landings.

6. Precast terrazzo jointing and edge configurations.

7. Terrazzo patterns.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory

required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each

terrazzo Sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and aggregate types, sizes, and

proportions. Prepare Samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the

Work, in sizes indicated below:

1. Terrazzo: 6-inch-square Samples.

2. Accessories: 6-inch-long Samples of each exposed strip item required.








B. Material Certificates: For each type of terrazzo material or product, from manufacturer.

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with

requirements.


A. Maintenance Data: For terrazzo to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Engage an installer who is a contractor member of NTMA.

2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by terrazzo manufacturer as qualified to

install manufacturer's products.

3. Provide a list of at least (5) epoxy terrazzo projects using material being submitted for

this project during the last five (5) years of the same scope, complexity, and at least 50%

of the square footage.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary terrazzo materials from single source from single

manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant,

and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary

materials.

C. Source Limitations for Aggregates: Obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular

materials from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for terrazzo including accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. of typical poured-in-place flooring and base condition

for each color and pattern in locations directed by Architect

b. Include base and first three stair treads <


Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.







A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with

source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.

B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated

area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate

temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting terrazzo

installation.

B. Prior to and during each day of installation, the terrazzo contractor shall verify that the dew

point is at least 5ºF (-15ºC) less than the slab and air temperature.

C. Acceptable Substrates:

1. Level tolerance: Concrete sub-floor shall be level with a maximum variation from level

of 1/4” in 10 feet (6.4 mm in 3.1m). Any irregularity of the surface requiring patching

and/or leveling shall be done using sand and epoxy fill.

2. Concrete floor shall be prepared mechanically by shot blasting in accordance with ICRI

Guideline No. 03732. Specifically, surface preparation results should achieve a CSP3-

CSP4 profile.

3. Concrete floor shall receive a steel trowel finish.

4. Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days. No curing agents are to be used in areas

to receive terrazzo.

5. Concrete slab shall have an efficient moisture vapor barrier (suggested minimum: 15 mils

(.4 mm thickness)) directly under the concrete slab. Moisture barrier shall NOT be

punctured.

6. Saw cutting of control joints must be done between 12 and 24 hours after placement of

the structural concrete and at a frequency compatible to ACI recommendations.

D. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with precast terrazzo

by field measurements before fabrication.

E. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting

conditions during terrazzo installation.

F. Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo application and for not less than 24 hours after

application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

G. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent

construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary terrazzo materials from single source from single

manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant,

and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary

materials.

B. Source Limitations for Aggregates: Obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular

materials from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.


A. NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and with

written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are

specified.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing

and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using

Environmental Chambers." (California Prop 65 Test)

2.3 EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO

A. Epoxy-Resin Terrazzo TZ1, TZ2, TZB2 and TZ3 Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo

Specifications and Design Guide" and manufacturer's written instructions for matrix and

aggregate proportions and mixing.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Crossfield Products Corp., Dex-O-Tex Division; Cheminert Terrazzo.

b. General Polymers Corporation; Terrazzo 1100.

c. Master Terrazzo Technologies, Morricite, Epoxy Terrazzo (Basis-of-Design

Product).

d. Quadrant Chemical Corporation; Quadset Epoxy Terrazzo.

e. TEC Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; Tuff-Lite Epoxy Terrazzo.

f. Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies; Terroxy Resin Systems.

2. Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal.

3. Custom Mix Color and Pattern:

a. TZ1: Master Terrazzo Technologies, Morricite Epoxy Terrazzo, 1020 (1502) Off-

White, (Field).













b. TZ2/TZB2: Master Terrazzo Technologies, Morricite Epoxy Terrazzo, 9059

(6957) Med. Gray (Accent), to contain metal shavings as a decorative addition.

c. TZ3: Master Terrazzo Technologies, Morricite Epoxy Terrazzo, 9060 (6958) bk.

Gray (Accent)

B. Materials:

1. Flexible Reinforcing Membrane: Manufacturer's resinous membrane for substrate-crack

preparation and reflective-crack reduction.

a. Reinforcement: Fiberglass scrim.

b. Reference Drawings for anticipated quantity required

c. Fill concrete with epoxy filler prior to installation of fiberglass scrim

2. Primer: Manufacturer's primer with vapor retarder recommended for substrate and use

indicated

3. Moisture Vapor Treatment: Manufacturer’s moisture mitigation system.

a. Physical properties of moisture mitigating primer shall have a maximum of 0.3

perms with 100% RH.

b. Contractor to include Moisture Vapor Treatment (MVT) for all slabs on grade,

lightweight concrete and green concrete conditions

4. Epoxy-Resin Matrix: Manufacturer's standard recommended for use indicated and in

color required for mix indicated.

a. Physical Properties without Aggregates:

1) Hardness: 60 to 88 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D.

2) Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi per ASTM D 638 for a 2-inch

specimen made using a "C" die per ASTM D 412.

3) Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 695, Specimen B

cylinder.

4) Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects by contaminants listed below

after seven-day immersion at room temperature per ASTM D 1308.

a) Distilled water.

b) Mineral water.

c) Isopropanol.

d) Ethanol.

e) 0.025 percent detergent solution.

f) 1.0 percent soap solution.

g) 10 percent sodium hydroxide.

h) 10 percent hydrochloric acid.

i) 30 percent sulfuric acid.






j) 5 percent acetic acid.

b. Physical Properties with Aggregates: For resin blended with Georgia white marble,

ground, grouted, and cured per requirements in NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications

and Design Guide"; comply with the following:

1) Flammability: Self-extinguishing, maximum extent of burning 1/4 inch per

ASTM D 635.

2) Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 0.0025 inch/inch per deg F for

temperature range of minus 12 to plus 140 deg F per ASTM D 696.

3) Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according

to NFPA 253.

5. Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no

deleterious or foreign matter.

a. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131.

b. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent.

c. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.

d. Recycled Content of Epoxy-Resin Terrazzo: Postconsumer recycled content plus

one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 10 percent.

6. Finishing Grout: Resin based.

2.4 PRECAST EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of but not


1. Precast Terrazzo Enterprises, Raleigh, NC 800-849-8849.

2. Romoco Precast Terrazzo Products, Manheim, PA 717-665-2739.

3. Wausau Tile/Tectura Design, Wausau, WI 800-388-8738.

B. Precast Terrazzo Base, TZB2: Minimum 3/8 inch thick, epoxy terrazzo units cast in maximum

lengths possible, but not less than 36 inches. Comply with NTMA’s written recommendations

for fabricating precast terrazzo base units in sizes and profiles indicated.

1. Type: Straight.

2. Top Edge: Beveled 1/8 inch with polished top surface.

3. Outside Corner Units: With finished returned edges at outside corner.

C. Color, Pattern, and Finish: To match TZ’s as indicated on drawings. Precast Terrazzo Units

(stair treads, and risers): Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for fabricating precast

terrazzo units in sizes and profiles indicated. Reinforce units as required by unit sizes, profiles,

and thicknesses and as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed-to-view edges and

reveals to match face finish. Ease exposed edges to 1/8-inch radius.






1. Stair treads and risers.

2. Color, Pattern, and Finish: as shown on drawings.

2.5 STRIP MATERIALS

A. Thin-Set Divider Strips: L-type angle, 3/8 inch deep.

1. Material: Annodized Aluminum or Zinc.

2. Top Width: 1/4 inch, 16-gauge. (NOTE: When two colors of terrazzo touch, separate

with ¼” thick divider strip)

B. Control-Joint Strips: Control joints should be detailed in accordance with NTMA Technical

Bulletin T-24. Single L-type angles, that match material and color of divider strips and in depth

required for topping thickness indicated.

1. Option 1 Preferred: L-type minimum ¼” width between Fill joint and area between strips

with semi-flexible joint filler.

2. Option 2. Fill saw cut with 100% solids epoxy. Place single L-tupe angle strip

shouldered on concrete, adjacent to the joint.

3. Option 3. For artwork considerations only. Buried joint: Fill saw cut with 100% solids

epoxy, followed by application of Master Terrazzo’s MasterFlex Membrane (Flexible

Reinforcing Membrane), or equal with fiberglass mesh reinforcement embedded into the

membrane. Note: Movement from the substrate may reflect through the finished

flooring.

C. Accessory Strips: Match divider-strip width, based on abutting materials thickness, and color

unless otherwise indicated. Use the following types of accessory strips as required to provide a

complete installation:

1. Edge-bead strips for exposed edges of terrazzo.

D. Abrasive Strips: Two-line Abrasive nosing strip and two-line abrasive inserts at nosings. Silicon

carbide or aluminum oxide, or combination of both, in epoxy-resin binder and set in channel.

1. Width: 1/2 inch

2. Depth: As required by terrazzo thickness.

3. Length: 4 inches less than stair width

4. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Strip Adhesive: Epoxy-resin adhesive recommended by adhesive manufacturer for this use.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California








Chambers."

B. Anchoring Devices:

1. Strips: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as

recommended by manufacturer and required for secure attachment to substrate.

2. Precast Terrazzo: Provide mechanical anchoring devices as recommended by fabricator

for proper anchorage and support of units for conditions of installation and support.

C. Patching and Fill Material: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and

recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

D. Joint Compound: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by

manufacturer for application indicated.

E. Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10

that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by sealer manufacturer for use on

terrazzo type indicated.

F. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not

affect terrazzo color or physical properties; is recommended by sealer manufacturer; and

complies with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type indicated

1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047.

2. Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10.

3. Sealers shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Sealers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances,

have been corrected.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair

terrazzo bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo application.

B. Concrete Slabs:

1. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds,

form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with

terrazzo.

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains

the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum

pickup. Surface preparation results should achieve a CSP 3- CSP 4 profile

according to International Concrete Repair Institute Guideline No. 03732.

b. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to terrazzo manufacturer's


c. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according

to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable

levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Moisture Testing: perform test indicated below:

a. In-situ Probe Test: Perform relative humidity test using in-situ probes per ASTM

F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75%

relative humidity level measurement.

3.3 EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo and accessory installation.

B. Comply and install per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions for ventilation and fire protection.

D. Place, rough grind, grout, cure grout, fine grind, and finish terrazzo according to manufacturer's

written instructions and NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide."

1. Grind to minimum 200 grit diamond pad polish

E. Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to 1/4 inch in 10 feet

noncumulative.

F. Ensure that matrix components and fluids from grinding operations do not stain terrazzo by

reacting with divider and control-joint strips.






G. Delay fine grinding until heavy trade work is complete and construction traffic through area is

restricted.

H. Flexible Reinforcing Membrane:

1. Prepare and prefill substrate cracks with membrane material.

2. Install membrane at substrate cracks, existing sawcut joint, control joints and divider

strips in areas to receive terrazzo.

3. Reinforce membrane with fiberglass scrim.

4. Prepare membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions before applying

substrate primer.

I. Primer: Apply to terrazzo substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Strip Materials:

1. Divider and Control-Joint Strips:

a. Locate divider strips where lines occur between different colors of terrazzo’s on

pattern plans.

b. Install control-joint strips in locations indicated.

c. Install control-joint strips with 1/4-inch gap between strips, and install sealant in

gap.

d. Install strips in adhesive setting bed without voids below strips, or mechanically

anchor strips as required to attach strips to substrate, as recommended by strip

manufacturer.

2. Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation

3. Abrasive Strips: Install with surface of abrasive strip positioned 1/16 inch higher than

terrazzo surface.

3.4 PRECAST TERRAZZO INSTALLATION

A. Install precast terrazzo units using method recommended by NTMA and manufacturer unless


B. Do not install units that are chipped, cracked, discolored, or not properly finished.

C. Seal joints between units with joint compound matching precast terrazzo matrix

3.5 REPAIR

A. Cut out and replace terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate. Cut out terrazzo

areas in panels defined by strips and replace to match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels

according to NTMA's written recommendations, as approved by Architect.







A. Cleaning:

1. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas.

2. Wash surfaces with cleaner according to NTMA's written recommendations and

manufacturer's written instructions; rinse surfaces with water and allow them to dry

thoroughly.

B. Sealing:

1. Seal surfaces according to NTMA's written recommendations.

2. Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer,

that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.






TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile and transition accessories.


1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings.

2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" and Section 096519 "Resilient Tile

Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade

resistance.

2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of

substrate.





3. Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with


4. Environmental Product Declaration for all flooring types.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture

required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern,

and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample of each type of carpet specified.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping (resilient or metal): 12-

inch-long Samples.








D. Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the

following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products

and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet

tile.




contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type

indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International

Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and

ventilation limitations.






B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed

and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and

humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the

remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry

to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet

tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,

failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.


a. Edge raveling, snags, and runs.

b. Dimensional instability.

c. Excess static discharge.

d. Loss of tuft-bind strength.

e. Loss of face fiber.

f. Delamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE CPTI


following:

1. Bentley Prince Street, Inc.

2. Interface, LLC.

3. J&J Invision; J&J Industries, Inc.


5. Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC.

6. Patcraft; a division of Shaw Industries, Inc.















8. Tandus Centiva; a Tarkett company. Basis-of-Design Product.

B. Pattern and Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

C. Pattern Scale: Large.

D. Fiber Content: 100% continuous filament nylon 6 or 6.6; 70% solution dyed nylon, 30%

yarn dyed nylon.

E. Pile Characteristic: Multi Level-patterned loop pile.

F. Density: 3,850 oz./sq.yd.

G. Pile Thickness: 0.187 inches for finished carpet tile according to ASTM D 6859.

H. Stitches: 10 stitches per inch.

I. Gage: 5/64 ends per inch.

J. Surface Pile Weight: 20 oz./sq.yd.

K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Non-PVC Fiberglass-reinforced amorphous resin with

recycled content.

L. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

M. Applied Treatments:

1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment.

N. Sustainable Design Requirements:

1. Sustainable Product Certification: Platinum level certification according to

ANSI/NSF 140.

2. Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department

of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile



less.

O. Performance Characteristics:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to

ASTM D 7330.

2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to

NFPA 253.

3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646.

4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 lbf according to ASTM D 1335.








5. Delamination: No delamination for the life of the carpet.

6. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined

by physical measurement.

7. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).

8. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.

9. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units)

according to AATCC 16, Option E.

10. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 2 kV according to AATCC 134.

2.2 CARPET TILE CPT2


following:

1. Bentley Prince Street, Inc.

2. Interface, LLC.

3. J&J Invision; J&J Industries, Inc.


5. Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC.

6. Patcraft; a division of Shaw Industries, Inc.


8. Tandus Centiva; a Tarkett company. Basis-of Design Product.

B. Pattern and Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

C. Fiber Content: 100% continuous filament solution dyed or nylon 6, 6 or 6.

D. Pile Characteristic: Multi Level-patterned loop pile.

E. Density: 4,620 oz./sq.yd.

F. Pile Thickness: 0.187 inches for finished carpet tile according to ASTM D 6859.

G. Stitches: 8 stitches per inch.

H. Gage: 1/12 ends per inch.

I. Surface Pile Weight: 24 oz./sq.yd.

J. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Non-PVC Fiberglass-reinforced amorphous resin with

recycled content.

K. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

L. Applied Treatments:

1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment.















M. Sustainable Design Requirements:

1. Sustainable Product Certification: Platinum level certification according to

ANSI/NSF 140.

2. Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department

of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile



less.

N. Performance Characteristics:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 3.5 minimum according to

ASTM D 7330.

2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to

NFPA 253.

3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646.

4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 lbf according to ASTM D 1335.

5. Delamination: No delamination for the life of the carpet

6. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined

by physical measurement.

7. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).

8. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.

9. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units)

according to AATCC 16, Option E.

10. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 2 kV according to AATCC 134.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit

products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for

installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable

installation.






whichever is less.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Resilient or Extruded aluminum (finish as noted on

drawings), of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet,

and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.









PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and

other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and

foreign deposits.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. and

perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly

spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of

water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity

level measurement.

c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and

carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass

testing.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile

manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive

carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level

cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch

unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances

that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without

using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet

tile manufacturers.






D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular

Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings and as recommended in writing by

carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in

furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal

cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,

removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future

cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining

marking device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by

carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20,

"Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment

and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated

or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.






EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

exterior substrates:

1. Galvanized and non-galvanized steel and steel frames.

2. Galvanized metal.


1. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrication” where field priming is required, and for painting

finishes of exterior metals in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.







A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas (i.e. underside of

exterior metal decks, exterior structural framing, bollards, exterior ladders, exterior

door and frames, exposed steel masonry lintels and other exterior exposed steel

supports necessary to be painted).

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures

are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;

at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


following:

1. Behr Process Corporation.

2. Benjamin Moore & Company.

3. Benjamin Moore & Company (Canada).

4. Bennette Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc.

5. Betonel Ltd.






6. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc.

7. California Paints.

8. The Sherwin-Williams Co.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Exterior

Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are

listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as

demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint

materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples

are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may

be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing

agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove

noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces

painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected

materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying

materials, the two paints are incompatible.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

B. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and

are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of

item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using

methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of

subsequently applied paints.






3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in

"MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior

door frames.

4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.

5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory

primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate

identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured

film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush

marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines

and color breaks.

E. Painting includes exterior Fire Suppression and Plumbing Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Fire Suppression system piping.

b. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

c. Pipe hangers and support for Fire Suppression pipes


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and

apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations.







A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials

from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work

of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,

and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates (including Hollow Metal Doors and Frames):

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79.

b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.

c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #161.

e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates (Including galvanized steel guardrail systems):

1. Epoxy and Urethane System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, High Build, Self Priming, MPI #120

b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, exterior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, Two-Component exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #174






INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Cement board.

2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

3. Steel and iron.

4. Galvanized metal.

5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).

6. Wood.

7. PVC Plastic.

8. Gypsum board.


1. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop primed pipe and tube railings.

2. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

3. Section 099600 “High-Performance Coatings” for general field painting, (tile like

coating).

4. Section 099113 “Exterior Painting” for general field painting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,


B. MPI Gloss Level 2 (Flat): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85

degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell/Satin): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85

degrees, according to ASTM D 523.






D. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Eggshell/Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units

at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.



instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category


2. Indicate VOC content.


1. Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of

topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

E. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.




contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.













A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures

are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by but not

limited to one of the following:

1. Behr Process Corporation.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co.

3. California Paints.

4. Conco Paints.

5. Coronado Paint; Benjamin Moore Company.

6. Diamond Vogel Paints.

7. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel.

8. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.

9. Duron, Inc.

10. Frazee Paint; Comex Group.

11. Glidden Professional.

12. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc.

13. Kwal Paint; Comex Group.

14. M.A.B. Paints.

15. Master Coating Technologies, Scuffmaster, Scrubtough; Basis-of-Design Product.

16. McCormick Paints.

17. Parker Paint; Comex Group.

18. PPG Architectural Coatings.

19. Pratt & Lambert.

20. Rodda Paint Co.

21. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc.

22. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).




























23. United Gilsonite Laboratories.

24. Valspar Corporation - Architectural (Pro).

25. Vista Paint Corporation.

26. Zinsser; Rust-Oleum Corporation.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in

its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control: Not less than 85 percent of field-applied paints

and coatings that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the

following:

1. Low-Emitting Materials: VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the






following:



c. Nonflat - High-Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L.

d. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.

e. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L.

f. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

g. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.

h. Recycled Coatings: 250 g/L.

i. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 250 g/L.

D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.











2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint

materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples

are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may

be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing

agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:

1. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (CMUs): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing

finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems

indicated.










reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,



apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that

permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture

content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using

methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2.

2. SSPC-SP 3.

3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4.

4. SSPC-SP 11.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop

paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to

comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of

subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in

"MPI Manual."






1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment

or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory

primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats

of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured

film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush

marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines

and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic

Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.

e. Metal conduit.

f. Plastic conduit.

g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.

e. Metal conduit.

f. Plastic conduit.

g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material.

h. Other items as directed by Architect.






3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.



inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and


paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials

from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work

of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,

and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Cement Board Substrates:

1. Latex System MPI INT 3.3A:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI

#53.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

2. Latex System MPI RIN 3.3A:

a. Prime coat, MPI #53

b. Intermediate Coat, MPI #53.

c. Topcoat, MPI #53.






B. CMU Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 4.2D:

a. Block Filler Primer: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, Gloss Level

5, MPI #4.

b. Intermediate Coat: MPI#141.

c. Topcoat, MPI #141

2. High-performance Architectural Latex System MPI RIM 4.2K

a. Block Filler: MPI #4.

b. Primer: MPI #3.

c. Intermediate Coat: MPI #141.

d. Topcoat: MPI #141.

C. Structural Steel-Metal Fabrications:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.1R:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal Gloss Level 5, MPI #79.

b. Intermediate Coat: MPI #141.

c. Topcoat: MPI #141.

2. High Performance Architectural Latex System, MP1 RIN 5.1 R:

a. Prime Coat: MPI #141.



D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System MPI INT 5.3A & MPI RIN 5.3A:

a. Spot/Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, cementitious, Gloss Level 1, MPI #26.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat, MPI #53.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

E. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.4F and MPI RIN 5.4F::

a. Spot/Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, finish Level 5, MPI #95.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat, MPI #141.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 5),

MPI #141.






F. Wood Substrates: Wood paneling and casework.

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.4S:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, Gloss Level 3, MPI #39.

b. Intermediate Coat: MPI #139


G. PVC Plastic Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.8A & MPI RIN 6.8A:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, Gloss Level 3, MPI #17.

b. Intermediate Coat: MPI #139


H. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 9.2B:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, Gloss Level 3, MPI #50.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat. MPI #139.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss

Level 3), MPI #139.

2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI RIN 9.2B:

a. Prime Coat: MPI #139.








HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1

SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating

systems on the following substrates:

1. Interior Substrates:

a. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

b. Steel.

c. Galvanized metal.

d. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).

e. Gypsum board.


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of structural steel with

primers specified in this Section.

2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for general field painting.

3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for general field painting.

4. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" where universal shop primer is required for this

spec section.

5. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,


1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM (ASTM)

1. ASTM 1308, “Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear

and Pigmented Organic Finishes”.






2. ASTM D 2486, “Standard Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Latex Flat

Wall Paints”.

3. ASTM D 2794, “Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the

Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)”.

4. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.”


A. Performance

1. VOC: Coatings shall have less than 50 g/l of VOCs.

2. Fire Rating: Coatings shall be Type 1 or Class A fire rated, ASTM E 84.

3. Scrub Test: Greater than 60 in/lbs, ASTM D 2794.

4. Impact Resistance: Greater than 60 in/lbs, ASTM 2794.

5. Chemical Resistance: 10 (test maximum) for all chemicals tested, ASTM D 1308.

6. Finish: 10 percent to 15 percent gloss at 60 degrees.

7. Stain Removal: 8 to 10 (test maximum) for all stains tested, four hour open spot test.



instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category


2. Indicate VOC content.


1. Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with


C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of

topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 4 by 5 inches.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.







E. Quality Control Submittals: Submit letter from manufacturer stating that applicator has

completed manufacturer’s training program.




contents.

1. Extra Stock: 1 gallon of each base coat color used. Provide in sealed, labeled

containers.


A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the

manufacture of decorative finishes of types and sizes required, and whose products

have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of five years.

a. Manufacturer to certify they make all materials in this section.

b. All materials within special coating section including, but not limited to,

finishes, and primers shall be supplied by one manufacturer.

2. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of

three years of successful application experience with project utilizing decorative

finishes similar in type and scope to that required for this project and shall be

approved by the manufacturer.

a. Applicator shall certify that in writing that technicians utilized for work in this

section have been trained by the manufacturer or its representative.

b. Applicator shall include in his certification that specialized equipment as

required by the manufacturer shall be used for work in this Section.

B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections

made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards

for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application

of each coating system.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.







Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such

deviations in writing.









A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air

temperatures are between 50 and 80 deg F.

B. Relative humidity shall be less than 50 percent.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. Prevent wide temperature

fluctuations that could cause moisture condensation on freshly coated surfaces.

D. Provide adequate fresh air and ventilation during application.

E. Maintain minimum of 80 foot-candles on surface to be coated.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant the work of this Section to be in

accordance with the contract documents and free from faults and defects in materials for a

period of five years from date of substantial completion. This special warranty shall extend

the one year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions.

B. Additional Owner Rights: The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the

Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the contract

Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the

Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in

its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

D. Material Compatibility:






1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

E. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control: Not less than 85 percent of field-applied paints

and coatings that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the

following:

1. Low-Emitting Materials: VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the






following:



c. Nonflat - High-Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L.

d. Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100 g/L.

e. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

f. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L.

g. Low-Solids Coatings: 120 g/L.

h. Mastic Texture Coatings: 100 g/L.

i. Metallic Pigmented Coatings: 500 g/L.

j. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

k. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.

l. Reactive Penetrating Sealers: 350 g/L.

m. Recycled Coatings: 250 g/L.

n. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 250 g/L.

F. Colors: As indicated in finish legend.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design: Products specified are those as manufactured by Master Coating

Technologies, Scuffmaster, Scrubtough, or equal. Items specified are to establish a

standard of quality for design, function, materials and appearance. Subject to compliance

with requirements available manufacturer’s offering products that may be incorporated into

the work include, but are not limited to the following. The Architect will be the sole judge

of the basis of what is equivalent.







1. Duron Paints and Wallcoverings, Waterbased Tile Clad; www.duron.com.

2. Master Coating Technologies; Scuffmaster Scrubtough; www.mastercoating.com.

3. Sherwin Williams, Pro-Industrial Waterbased Catalyzed Epozy; www.sherwin-

williams.com.

B. Substitutions:

1. Submit proposed substitution to the Architect no fewer than 10 days before bid date.

Acceptance will be by Addendum.

2. Submit finish samples to match color of specified finishes, product data, application

instruction, test reports, etc. clearly indicate discrepancies between specified product

and proposed substitution.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Primer: Provide primer recommended by manufacturer for substrate.

1. Concrete and masonry: Suitable heavy-bodied latex vinyl acrylic block filler (if

filling pores is desired). Provide manufacturer’s recommended product if uniform

base color with pores exposed is desired.

a. Basis of Design: “Primemaster/Primer/Sealer,” Master Coating Technologies.

2. Primed metals: No primer required.

3. Unprimed Metals: In accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. New Gypsum Board

a. Basis of Design: “Primemaster Primer/Sealer,” Master Coating Technologies.

B. Finish System Components:

1. Finish coat: Two-component polyurethane-fortified coating and cross-linker.

a. Basis-of-Design: “Scuffmaster ScrubTough,” Master technologies.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Spray or roll primers and base coats in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

http://www.mastercoating.com/






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.

3. Masonry (CMUs): 12 percent.

4. Wood: 15 percent.

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing

finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems

indicated.





reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil,



apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.






D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture

content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in


1. Tool joints and clean surfaces with pressurized water. Rinse off cleaning solutions

and allow surface to dry. Allow new mortar to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to

coating.

E. Ferrous Metals: Remove rust and mill scale. Wire brush or sand damaged or rusted areas

to bright metal remove grease and other foreign materials with mineral spirits. Touch-up

damaged areas of shop primer.

F. Non-ferrous metals: Clean with lacquer thinner.

G. Aluminum Substrates: Thoroughly degrease using non-hydrocarbon solvent cleaner.

Etching is recommended before priming if possible. As an alternative, use a wash primer

prior to the paint application.

H. Gypsum Board: Apply joint tape and compound to joists, fastener heads, dents, and surface

flaws as specified in Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board. Sand smooth and flush with

adjacent surfaces. Thoroughly clean sanded areas of dust with a clean damp rag.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Closets and storage areas shall be finished inside in the same manner as adjoining

rooms.

2. Finish HVAC registers and grilles and other items located in surfaces to receive

coatings.

B. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

1. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment

or furniture with prime coat only.

2. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged

items to match exposed surfaces.

3. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment

name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats

of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but

provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.






D. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured

film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

E. Apply as many primer coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do

not exceed manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate. Allow to dry prior to application

of subsequent coats.

F. Re-prime suction and hot spots on substrates prior to applying base coatings.

G. Over gypsum board, sand primer with 100 grit or finer sand paper. Thoroughly remove

dust from sanding with a clean, wet rag.

H. Apply each coat to a natural break point such as an edge or corner without stopping.

I. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush

marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and

color breaks without overlaps.



inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with

coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and


coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Clean overspray and spills. Remove masking.

B. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials

from Project site.

C. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings

by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished

surfaces.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to

work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by

Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.






E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Applicator

that shall ensure that the high performance coatings shall be without damage at time of


F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced coated surfaces.







VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1

SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Markerboards. (Wall-mounted)

2. Tackboards. (Wall-mounted)

3. Tackboards (In display cases)

4. Tempered glass display case unit(s) incorporated into casework.

5. Polycarbonate panels on stand-offs.


1. Section 101200 “Display Cases” for individually framed and enclosed, recessed-

mounted Tackboards within display cases.

2. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets” for display case

units incorporated in casework.

3. Section 092900 “Gypsum Board”

4. Section 102600 “Wall and Door Protection”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed, tackable, visual display board assembly.

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into

composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes markerboards, and

tackboards.

C. Display Case: Glazed Cabinet with adjustable shelves and locking doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual

display surfaces.






B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of panel joints.

2. Show locations of field assembled joints for factory-fabricated units too large to ship

in one piece.

3. Include sections of typical trim members.

4. Include wiring diagrams for power and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated, for units

with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows:

1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet and tackboard assembly.

2. Samples of cork-faced tack assemblies.

3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.

4. Trim – corner assembly samples.

5. Glass Samples with frame assembly.

6. Polycarbonate samples with stand-off assembly.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated.

1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, mounted on substrate

indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture

required.

2. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.

3. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.

E. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance

manuals.







A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this

Project.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces completely assembled in one piece without

joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide

two (2) or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions

require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery,

and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are

enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is

complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature

and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction

period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual

display units by field measurements before fabrication.

1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication

might delay the work.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in








a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.

b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Fifty (50) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain-enamel

coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated.



to, the following:

a. AARCO Product, Inc.

b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

c. Egan Visual Inc.

d. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.

e. Newline Products

f. PolyVision Corporation

g. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.

2. Matte Finish: Low reflective; chalk/marker wipes clean with dry cloth or standard

eraser.

B. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin

board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

2.2 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES, MB

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard

assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and porcelain-

enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish.



to, the following:

a. AARCO Products, Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=570&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456791378&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=575&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd







b. ADP Lemco, Inc.

c. Aywon.

d. Bangor Cork Company, Inc.

e. Best-Rite Manufacturing.

f. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

g. Egan Visual Inc.

h. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.

i. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.

j. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.

k. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.

l. Tri-Best Visual Display Products.

2. Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch thick; with 0.005-inch-thick, aluminum foil backing.

3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic

type.

2.3 TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES, TB

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Forbo, Bulletin

Board, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. A-1 Visual Systems.

2. AARCO Products, Inc.

3. ADP Lemco, Inc.

4. Aywon.

5. Bangor Cork Company, Inc.

6. Best-Rite Manufacturing.

7. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

8. Egan Visual Inc.

9. EverProducts by Glenroy Inc.

10. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.

11. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.

12. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.

13. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.

14. Tri-Best Visual Display Products.

B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard: 1/4-inch-thick, uni-color plastic-impregnated cork

sheet factory laminated to jute backing. Uni-color extends throughout thickness of material.

2.4 MARKERBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded

aluminum; standard size and shape.

1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.































B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.

1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum

end closures.

C. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories:

1. Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork

approximately 1 to 2 inches wide.

2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.

3. Map Hooks and Clips: Two (2) map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 48

inches of map rail or fraction thereof.

4. Flag Holder: One (1) for each room.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and

backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard

flexible, waterproof adhesive.

B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assembled visual display boards unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to

visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim

and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length.

Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as

acceptable to Architect.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting

sections of markerboards.

3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards and

tackboards of combination units.

4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to

normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by

Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit

conditions indicated.

D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints

to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to

visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.









B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,






A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2.8 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE

A. Visual Display Board: Factory assembled.

1. Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly.

a. Color: White.

2. Corners: Square.

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Height: 4 feet.

5. Mounting: Wall.

6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings.

7. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard with clear anodic finish.

8. Accessories:

a. Chalktray: Box type.

b. Map rail with display rail, end stops, map hooks and clips and flag holder.

B. Tackboard: Factory assembled.

1. Tack Surface: Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2. Corners: Square.


4. Height: 4 feet.

5. Mounting: Wall.







7. Edges: Concealed by trim.

a. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard style, with clear

anodic finish.

C. Tackboard (TB1): Factory assembled.



2. Corners: Square.


4. Height: 2 feet.

5. Mounting: Wall.


7. Edges: Concealed by trim.

a. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard style, with clear

anodic finish

D. Visual Display Rail: Factory assembled.



2. Size: 2 inches high by length indicated on Drawings.

3. Edges: Extruded-aluminum trim.

4. Ends: Aluminum.

5. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

2.9 GRAPHIC PANELS - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

one of the following manufacturers, or equal: Lexan; Basis-of-Design, Makrolon, Palram

A. Polycarbonate Panels (Qty 2)

1. Each panel ± ¼” thick

2. Non/low glare

3. Impact resistant

4. Color: Clear

5. Size: As indicated on drawings.

6. Performance Requirements:

a. 1 CC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-2728

b. CSC 16 CFR 1201 Category.

c. Class A: ANSI Z97.1 – 2004; American Standard for Safety Glazing

Materials used in buildings.






d. UL94: Flammability, UL File #E351891

B. Stand-offs - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following manufacturers, or equal: CR Laurence, Displays 2 Go, Gyford, Mockett; Basis-

of-Design Product, RAF Standoffs.


a. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel

b. Size: As indicated on drawings.

c. Tamper-resistant, requiring specialized tools for removal or adjustment.

d. Gasket/padding to protect polycarbonate finish rubber or felt.

e. Minimum parts to include: Finish cap, with gasket screw connector, barrel

with gasket, attachment mounting hardware.

C. Graphic Images – Provided by Owner


a. Chemical and corrosion resistant.

b. Support 5x the weight of the polycarbonate panel. (Sizes vary, see drawings)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting


B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth,

finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,

cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between

visual display surfaces and wall surfaces.







A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on

Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight,

level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors,

trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

1. Mounting Height: 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND

ASSEMBLIES

A. Visual Display Boards: Attach visual display boards to wall surfaces with egg-size

adhesive gobs at 16 inches o.c., horizontally and vertically.


A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one

cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.






DISPLAY CASES 101200 - 1

SECTION 101200 - DISPLAY CASES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Display cases.

2. Cable hung shelving system with clamps and fittings.


1. Section 102600 "Wall and Door Protection".

2. Section 088000 "Glazing".

3. Section123559 "Display Case Doors".

4. Section 26500 "Lighting".

5. Section 101100 “Visual Display Units” for tackboards.

6. Section 064023 “Interior Architectural Casework”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Display Case: Glazed cabinet with adjustable shelves and locking doors.

B. Tackboard: A material for holding push-pins or tacks typically consisting of a facing; such

as fabric, vinyl, or cork; adhered to a substrate; such as fiberboard, hardboard, particleboard

can occur as stand-alone with frames or inside of a glazed display case/cabinet on vertical

face(s).




components and profiles, and finishes for display cases. Include furnished specialties

and accessories.

2. Include electrical characteristics for illuminated display cases that occur in interior

architectural casework or as a part of the general construction.










C. Shop Drawings: For display cases (recessed or incorporated in casework).


2. Include sections of typical trim members.

3. Show location of seams and joints in Tackboard panels.

4. Include diagrams for wiring of illuminated display cases.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Include Samples of cables, hardware. mounts and factory-finished trim involving

color finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish for the following.

1. Trim/Hardware: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.


A. Maintenance Data: For display cases to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install display cases and cable-hung shelves

for indoor installations until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is

complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is

operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy

levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings for display case, glass shelves

(088000 "Glazing") and doors (123559 "Display Case Doors") by field measurements

before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain display case components from single source from single

manufacturer. Exception: display case doors, glass shelves (08 80 00 “Glazing”), and

frame/inside finish wall panel (102600 “Wall and Door Protection”).







B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the

following:

1. Arakawa Hanging Systems; arakawagrip.com.

2. Grip Lock Systems; www.griplocksystems.com.

3. Nova Display, cable/rod suspended glass shelving kit – Basis-of-Design product;

www.novadisplay.com.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Cables: 3mm diameter cables constructed of 7x7 braided galvanized aircraft cable. 4.0M

(13’-1 1/2") long cable with ceiling to floor fittings to include cable, top and bottom fittings,

and spring tensioner. (Qty TBD, #CA4-3).

B. Supports:

1. Heavy duty supports (QTY 10 #HDS).

2. Single sided clamp support for glass shelves (Qty 20, #C3S-03)

3. Double sided clamp support for glass shelves (Qty 30, #C3S-04)

4. Screw set with Teflon tip M6 x 8 mm (Qty 80, #P10/S-1N)

C. Shelves: Clear Tempered Glass:

1. Size: 12"D x 36"W x 3/8" Thick. (Qty 20)

2. Edge Profile: Flat, polished.

D. Back Panel: Natural-Cork Tackboard (TB1) panel.

1. Size: 48” wide x 90 lineal feet x ¼” thk.

2. Edge Profile: Square.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.


A. Cables rated at 400 lbs each.

B. Shelf supports rated at 25 lbs each.

http://www.griplocksystems.com/

http://www.novadisplay.com/






2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate bulletin board and display cases to requirements indicated for dimensions, design,

and thickness and finish of materials.

B. Use metals and shapes of thickness and reinforcing required to produce flat surfaces, and to

impart strength for size, design, and application indicated.

C. Fabricate frames with reinforced corners, mitered to a hairline fit, with decorative exposed

fasteners.




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections

before installation of illuminated units.

C. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for display cases.

D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth if recessed units will be installed.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for display cases as required by type and size of unit.






3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep

perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials,

adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.


B. Recessed Display Cases: Attach units to wall framing with fasteners at not more than 16

inches o.c. Attach aluminum trim over edges of recessed display cases and conceal grounds

and clips. Attach trim with fasteners at not more than 24 inches o.c.

C. Install display case shelving level and straight.


A. Adjust components to operate smoothly without warp or bind and so contact points meet

accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged areas.






DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fabricated channel dimensional characters.







C. Shop Drawings: For signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

other installers, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and

exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with

the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as

follows:

1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of dimensional character.

2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.







F. Product Schedule: For dimensional letter signs. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings or specified.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products or an entity that employs installers and

supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent

construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in



a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and

distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles;






internally braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or

other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows.


the following:

a. A.R.K. Ramos.

b. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.

c. Allen Industries Architectural Signage.

d. APCO Graphics, Inc.

e. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

f. Charleston Industries, Inc.

g. Cosco.

h. Gemini Incorporated.

i. Metallic Arts.

j. Signs & Decal Corp.

k. Steel Art Company.

2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.

3. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character.

4. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Character Depth: 1”.

6. Finishes:

a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.

7. Mounting: Projecting studs.

a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface.

8. Typeface: To be selected by Architect.

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs,

noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. For exterior exposure, furnish hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:


















a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use screws and bolts with

tamper-resistant slots unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back

of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped

lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements

indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling

limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in

locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to

resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide

welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed

side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and

contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance

loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.

6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.







C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to

long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.






D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after

fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless



A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps

or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with

sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris

that would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of

bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on

back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,

embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive

fully sets.






b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install

washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and

tighten.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with

specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or

components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair

procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a

clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.






ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1

SECTION 101423 – ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Room-identification signs with raised characters, braille, and raised room names.

2. Room-identification signs with raised numbers and braille. Interchangeable room

names on paper inserts.

3. Field-applied, vinyl-character signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent

construction by other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and

Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with

the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as

follows:

1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.






2. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Full-size Sample of characters on glass.

3. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign

schedule.





A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.





A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent

construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate


1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in



a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.

c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for

Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 INTERIOR ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Room Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces: with message and characters

having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles.

B. Basis of Design Product: System 2/90 Enhanced or approved comparable product by one of

the following manufacturers:

1. Ace Sign Systems, Inc.

2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.

3. Allen Industries, Inc.

4. Allen Markings International.

5. APCO Graphics, Inc.

6. ASE, Inc.

7. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

8. Best Sign Systems Inc.

9. Bunting Graphics, Inc.

10. Clarke Systems.

11. InPro Corporation.

12. Mohawk Sign Systems.

13. System 2/90.

14. TakeForm, Inc.

15. Vista System.

16. Vomar Products, Inc.

C. Enhanced Backer: backer plate applied with adhesive to back of sign

1. Enhanced Backer Material: Stainless Steel Backer: .031” vertical grade laminate and

laminated to .090” extruded ABS plastic

a. Color(s): Anodized Aluminum.

b. Shape: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Sign (Plaque)

1. Sign-Panel: ADA, Integral Plaque- Graphics and Plaque materials are one piece.

Tactile Photopolymer Inserts are .080” phenolic photopolymer with raised copy

etched to .032.” Background color is painted in acrylic lacquer in the specified Insert




















color (to match PT4, Sherwin Williams SW6236 Grays Harbor). Top surface of copy

characters is then added by roller printing in the specified color using Silkscreen inks

a. Numbers, letters, characters and symbols to be raised .032” from the

background surface. Color to be contrasting from background color.

b. Braille to be raised .032” from the background surface and match the

background color. Dimension measurements will comply with the new

ADAAG 703.3.1

E. Window Inserts: .040: Non-Glare PETG lense with die cut paper insert provided by owner

unless otherwise noted in drawings

F. Mounting: As recommended by manufacturer and approved by interior designer

2.3 EXTERIOR ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and

characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and

as follows:

B. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide System 2/90

Plaques or approved comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.

2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

3. Best Sign Systems Inc.

4. Bunting Graphics, Inc.

5. InPro Corporation.

6. Mohawk Sign Systems.

7. System 2/90.

8. TakeForm, Inc.

9. Vista System.

10. Vomar Products, Inc.

C. ADA Exterior Integral Tactile Plaque: Graphics and Plaque material are one piece: .015

aluminum pressure bonded with adhesive to .060 acrylic with .031” raised copy

Background color is painted in acrylic lacquer in the specified Plaque color (to match PT4,

Sherwin Williams SW6236 Grays Harbor). Top surface of copy characters is then added by

roller printing in the specified copy color using silkscreen inks. Color to be contrasting

from background color.

a. Color(s): As indicated on drawing.

D. Mounting: Concealed Screw Mounting.














2.4 FIELD-APPLIED, VINYL-CHARACTER SIGNS

A. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Sign: Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil thick,

weather-resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for

on-site alignment and application.



to, the following:

a. Allen Markings International.

b. APCO Graphics, Inc.

c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

d. Best Sign Systems Inc.

e. InPro Corporation.

f. Mohawk Sign Systems.

g. Nelson-Harkins Industries.

h. Seton Identification Products.

i. System 2/90

j. Takeform, Inc.

2. Size: As indicated and as scheduled.

3. Substrate: As indicated.

4. Text and Font: As indicated and as scheduled.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of

signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the

following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back

of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back

of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise

indicated.

c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of

head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.

B. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with

adhesive on both sides.













2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements

indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling

limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in

locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to

resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide

welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed

side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and

contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.

B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to

produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.

C. Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly

press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths.

D. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of

changeable messages as follows:

1. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that

inhibit function. Furnish initial changeable insert. Subsequent changeable inserts are

by Owner.







C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to

long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after

fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless








A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps

or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with

sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility

standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris

that would impair installation.

4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of

bituminous paint.

B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as

indicated and according to accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on

back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,






embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive

fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install

washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and

tighten.

2. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove

loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity

to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent

visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

D. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Clean and dry substrate. Align sign characters in

final position before removing release liner. Remove release liner in stages, and apply and

firmly press characters into final position. Press from the middle outward to obtain good

bond without blisters or fishmouths. Remove carrier film without disturbing applied vinyl

film.

E. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto

opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with

specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components

that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a

clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.






PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 1

SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures, screens, and urinal

screens.


1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers,

grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.




components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.




C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

4. Show locations of floor drains.

5. Show bracing locations (overhead, floor, and wall).

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes

unless otherwise indicated:







1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on

6-inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

E. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.



covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source.

1. Door Hinges: Two hinge(s) with associated fasteners.

2. Latch and Keeper: Two latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.

3. Door Bumper: Two bumper(s) with associated fasteners.

4. Door Pull: Two door pull(s) with associated fasteners.

5. Fasteners: Twenty fasteners of each size and type.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and

other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before

fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.






Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content

not less than 25 percent.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &


Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

D. Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion and

delamination under normal conditions.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS TP1


following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group.

2. AJW Architectural Products.

3. All American Metal Corp.

4. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.

5. Ampco Products, LLC.

6. Bradley Corporation.

7. Columbia Lockers; Partition Systems International of South Carolina.

8. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

9. Global Partitions; ASI Group.

10. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.

11. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.

12. Marlite.

13. Metpar Corp.

14. Scranton Products, Basis-of-Design Product.

15. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced, Floor anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung, Floor anchored.

D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE)

panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous

color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.

2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or

stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to

hinder malicious combustion.

3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as indicated by

manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer.























1. Polymer Color: Matching pilaster.

F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness

and construction of pilasters or 1-3/4-inch-square, aluminum tube with satin finish; with

shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or extruded

aluminum.

a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching panel.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch-thick stainless-steel continuous, cam

type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by

lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel

latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced

door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that

comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as

accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and

rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-

mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel bumper

at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors

that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both

sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with

antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel,

finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-

type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip

galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related

materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.






B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated.

Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where

required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,

leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at

pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor.

Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to

conceal anchorage.

E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging

doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a

minimum 32-inch-wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting


1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended

anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:






a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-

height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile

joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters

with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise

indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster

with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and

adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into

structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level,

plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of

pilasters when doors are in closed position.

D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level

and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors

open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-

swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.






FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 1

SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrically operated, acoustical panel partitions.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to

overhead structural system.

2. Electrical and communications Sections for electrical service and connections for

motor operators, controls, and limit switches and for system disconnect switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

C. STC: Sound Transmission Class.







costs.













C. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation

requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.


D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing,

prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches

square.

2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches long.

3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions.




involved:

1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage

layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.

c. Sprinklers.

d. Smoke detectors.

B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including

support-beam, mounting-hole template.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition.






1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished

panel facing material complies with requirements.

E. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance

manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include

precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to

finishes and performance.

b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating

components.

c. Electric operator and controls.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of

two panels when installed.





A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages

and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings

on panels.






1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel

partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing

agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for

laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90,

determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.



2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing,

suspension system, operators, and accessories.


the following:

a. Advanced Equipment Corporation.

b. CURTITION; KWIK-Wall.

c. FolDoor.

d. Hufcor, Inc.

e. KWIK-WALL Company.

f. Moderco Inc.

g. Modernfold, Inc.

h. Panelfold Inc.

i. Skyfold, Inc.: Skyfold Classic 51 basis of design product.

B. Panel Operation: Electrically operated, continuously hinged panels.















C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with

reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and

concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb;

aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist,

deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of

dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

1. Panel Width: Equal widths.

E. STC: Not less than 50.

F. Panel Weight: 10 lb/sq. ft. maximum.

G. Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches.

H. Panel Materials:

1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content not less than 25 percent.

2. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be labeled according to the AF&PA's

Sustainable Forestry Initiative, be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-

001 and FSC STD-40-004, or be certified and labeled according to the standards of

the Programme for Endorsement of Forest Certification.

3. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

4. Composite Wood Products: Formaldehyde emission rates shall not be greater than the

following when tested according to ASTM D 6007 or ASTM E 1333:

a. Hardwood Plywood: 0.05 ppm.

b. Particleboard: 0.09 ppm.

c. MDF More Than 5/16 Inch Thick: 0.11 ppm.

d. MDF 5/16 Inch or Less in Thickness: 0.13 ppm.

5. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for

uncoated steel.

6. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard

minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel.

a. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum.

I. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and

accessories; with decorative, protective finish.










2.3 SEALS

A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance

requirements and the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated.

2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.

3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent

panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when

operable panel partition is extended and closed.

B. Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with

continuous PVC acoustical seal.

C. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant

pressure on track or PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal

exerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended.

D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous-contact seal exerting uniform

constant pressure on floor.

2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS

A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response

characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate

backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing


B. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around

panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical

panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.

2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for

operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support

partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel

partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch

between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to

accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.






1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of

the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish.

2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied,

decorative, protective finish.

B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and

for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

1. Multidirectional Carriers: Capable of negotiating intersections without track

switches.

C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track

configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with

partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or

aluminum.

1. Curve-and-Diverter Switches: Allow radius turns to divert panels to an auxiliary

track.

2. L Intersections: Allow panels to change 90 degrees in direction of travel.

3. T Intersections: Allow panels to pass through or change 90 degrees to another

direction of travel.

4. X Intersections: Allow panels to pass through or change travel direction full circle in

90-degree increments, and allow one partition to cross track of another.

5. Multidirectional Switches: Adjustable switch configuring track into L, T, or

X intersections and allowing panels to be moved in all pass-through, 90-degree

change, and cross-over travel direction combinations.

6. Center carrier stop.

D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish


E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective

coating unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 ELECTRIC OPERATORS

A. General: Factory-assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended

and provided by operable panel partition manufacturer for partition specified; with electric

motor and factory-prewired motor controls, speed reducer, chain drive, control stations,

control devices, and accessories required for operation. Include wiring from control stations

to motor. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with

building electrical system.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.






D. Control Stations: Two single-key-operated, constant-pressure control stations located

remotely from each other on opposite sides and opposite ends of partition run. Wire in

series to require simultaneous activation of both key stations to operate partition. Each

three-position control station labeled "Open," "Close," and " Stop." Furnish two keys per

station.

E. Obstruction-Detection Devices: Equip each motorized operable panel partition with

indicated automatic safety sensor that causes operator to immediately shut off motor.

1. Infrared Sensor System: Designed to detect an obstruction in partition's path and

sound an audible alarm, without obstruction contacting partition.

F. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to

automatically stop operable panel partition at fully extended and fully stacked positions.

G. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect-release of electric-motor drive system,

permitting manual operation in event of operating failure.

H. Electric Interlock: Equip each motorized operable panel partition with electric interlocks at

locations indicated, to prevent operation of operable panel partition under the following

conditions:

1. On storage pocket door, to prevent operation if door is not in fully open position.

2. On partitions at location of convergence by another partition, to prevent operation if

merging partitions are in place.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

operable panel partitions.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel

partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including

painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.






D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is

not acceptable.

F. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints

and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of

vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. Perform test and make

adjustments before NIC testing.


A. NIC Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select one operable panel partition

installation(s) for testing.

2. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise

isolation according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not

less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method

requirements.

B. An operable panel partition installation will be considered defective if it does not pass tests

and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly,

and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.


A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative.

Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition

operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and

supplies.






3.6 DEMONSTRATION


to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.







WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal Corner Guards.

2. Metal Door and Wall Protection Sheets.


1. Section 092900 “Gypsum Board”

2. Section 057300 "Metal Railings" for metal handrails without plastic bumpers.

3. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal protective trim units, according to

BHMA A156.6, used for kick plates.

4. Section 101200 “Display Cases”.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of corner, wall and door protection showing locations and

extent.


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant corner/wall/door protection

unit indicated, in each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products,

prepared on Samples of size indicated below:






1. Wall Protection and Door Protection (Kick-Plate) Sheets: 12 inches long. Include

examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps, field splices, and attachment

hardware.

2. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps and attachment hardware.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in


1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best

condition of corner and door protection under anticipated traffic and use conditions.

Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be

detrimental to finishes and performance.




contents.

1. Wall Protection Sheet Covers: Full-size covers of maximum length equal to 2

percent of each type, color and texture of cover installed.

2. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each

type, color, and texture of cover installed.

3. Door Kick Plate covers: Full size covers equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and

texture of cover installed.

4. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of

extra materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra

material.


A. Store wall, base, corner and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers

inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures,

and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the

period solid metal materials are stored.

2. Keep materials out of direct sunlight.

3. Store wall/corner and door protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or

until material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.






b. Store wall protection sheets and door kick plate protection sheets in a

horizontal position.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer has a minimum of five years’ experience in manufacturing components

similar to or exceeding requirements of project.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in

installation work similar to that required for this project.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other

construction activities.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Products are free from defects in workmanship and materials when the product is

delivered, prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the

following:

1. Diamond Life; diamondlifegear.com.

2. Gage; gagecorp.net.

3. Koffler Sales (wall and door protection sheets) Basis-of-Design Product;

Kofflersales.com.

4. Korogard (corner guards), Basis-of-Design Product; Korogard.com.

5. Moz; mozdesigns.com.







A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &


Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Solid Metal Corner Guards, CG1: Including mounting hardware;

fabricated with 90- degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Stainless steel corner guard, Korogard, or equal.

a. Profile: Nominal 1-inch-long leg wing span, 16-gage.

b. Height: to align with top edge of door frame.

c. Pattern and Texture: Smooth, satin finish.

d. Color: Stainless steel #4 satin finish.

e. Class A/1 fire rated.

f. Warranty: 5-year minimum.

2. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware; per manufacturers

recommended installation instructions.

2.4 WALL PROTECTION SHEETS (MWP1)

A. Solid Metal, wall protection sheets, MWP1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Diamond Plate Sheets, wall panels and/or tiles, Koffler

Sales #A422 or equal.

a. Profile: 0.045" thick, 17 gage, available in tiles 24"x 24", or sheets 48" x 48",

48" x 96".

b. Height: As noted on drawings.

c. Color: Chrome consistent with MWP1, CG1, and DPB1 color and sheen.

d. Pattern and Texture: Diamond Plate, scale consistent with MWP1, LG1,

DPB1 Reference Finish Legend.

e. Accessories; concealed splices and mounting hardware; per manufacturer’s

recommended installation instructions.

2.5 METAL DOOR PROTECTION SHEETS (KICK PLATES, CUSTOM SIZED)

A. Wall protection sheets, solid metal construction.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Diamond Plate Sheets, solid metal construction, used as

door kickplates, Koffler Sales #A422, or equal.







a. Profile: 0.045" thick, 17 gage, available in sheets 48" x 48", 48" x 96"; edges

beveled (all sides).

b. Size:

i. At pairs of doors provide width one inches less than door width on both

sides.

ii. Height: 1/2 of door height.

*Note: Provide on the corridor side of door units, for door numbers:

A107, A114E, and A116A.

c. Color: Chrome.

d. Pattern and Texture: Diamond Plate, scale non-directional.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate corner and wall/door protection according to requirements indicated for design,

performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize

field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed

edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other

imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline

joints.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.






B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds,

and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure

attachment of support fasteners.

1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and

suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door

protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written

instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with

chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights

indicated on Drawings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a

standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.






TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Underlavatory guards.

3. Custodial accessories.


1. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other

work and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of

each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.







A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products

from single source from single manufacturer.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances

required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,

operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless


B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat

products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel),

0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-

and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.






2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated.

Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the named product or a comparable

product by one of the following:

1. AJW Architectural Products, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

4. Bradley Corporation

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: D

1. Basis-of-Design Product: AJW Architectural Products, Inc. U840 Toilet Tissue

Dispenser

2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler

lockset.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted.

4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle.

5. Capacity: Designed for 5 1/4-inchdiameter tissue rolls.

6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) with black ABS plastic

spindle.

C. Towel (Roll) Dispenser: D (Owner Provided, Contractor Installed)

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vista A Matic 58553

D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser: G (Owner Provided, Contractor Installed)

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Select Specialty Foaming Dispenser

E. Grab Bar: A 36”, B 42”, C 18” Vertical

1. Basis-of-Design Product: AJW Architectural Products, Inc., UG2-A Grab Bars

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

3. Material: Stainless steel, 18-gauge thick.

4. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin)

5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.

6. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: E

1. Basis-of-Design Product: AJW Architectural Products, Inc.,, U580 Partition Mounted

and U582 Surface Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal

2. Mounting: Partition mounted at accessible and adjacent toilet stall. Surface mounted

all others.

3. Door or Cover: Self-closing push panel with full-length piano hinge and tumbler

lockset.

4. Receptacle: Removable.






5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

G. Mirror Unit: F

1. Basis-of-Design Product: AJW Architectural Products, Inc.

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 18-gauge, No. 4 satin finish.

a. Corners: Welded mitered and ground smooth.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method

indicated below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices

requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Robe Hook: J

1. Basis-of-Design Product: AJW Architectural Products, Inc., UB14 Chrome Coat

Hook and Bumper

2. Description: Single-prong unit.

3. Material and Finish: Chrome plated solid brass with nickel and copper plating.

2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Underlavatory Guard

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Trubro Lav Guard 2.

2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that

prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without

removing coverings.

3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Mop and Broom Holder: J

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-239

2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf

3. Length: 34 Inches

4. Hooks: Four

5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.

6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).






2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors

and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage

and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and

resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units

level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according

to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective

items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.






FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and

panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semi recessed-,

or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6

by 6 inches square.

D. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semi recessed, or

surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher

schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.






1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire

extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.



to, the following:

a. American Specialties, Inc.

b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

c. GMR International Equipment Corporation.

d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

e. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

f. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.

g. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

h. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.

i. MOON American.

j. Nystrom, Inc.

k. Potter Roemer LLC.

l. Strike First Corporation of America.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Semi recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no

trim.

F. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.



















G. Door Material: Steel sheet.

H. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

I. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to

open 180 degrees.

K. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher

to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire

extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling

sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter

style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing.

2) Application Process: Silk-screened.

3) Lettering Color: Red.

4) Orientation: Vertical.

L. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color

densities.

2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3

mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door,

and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.






1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials

indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,

minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.

3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground

smooth.


A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi recessed

cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semi recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of

cabinet and trim style.






3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if

not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and

plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection

cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral

locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to

factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished

by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire

extinguisher.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit

and function.






1.7 WARRANTY


replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,

"Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent


1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.



to, the following:

a. Amerex Corporation.

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International.

c. Badger Fire Protection.

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

g. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

h. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.

i. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

j. MOON American.

k. Nystrom, Inc.

l. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; Pem Systems, Inc.



















m. Potter Roemer LLC.

n. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products.

o. Strike First Corporation of America.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,

maintenance, and recharging.

B. Regular Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2 A10 BC nominal capacity, with sodium

bicarbonate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container, suitable for

use in electrically energized equipment where fire extinguishers shall be non-conductive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.









SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS 105113 - 1

SECTION 105113 – SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Knocked-down corridor lockers.


A. Product Data: For each type of solid plastic (HDPE) locker.


components and profiles, installation instructions, and finishes for each type of solid

plastic (HDPE) locker.


1. Product Data: For solid plastic products, indicating compliance with requirements for

VOC emissions.

2. Product Data: For solid plastic products indicating recycled content, post-consumer

and pre-consumer.

C. Shop Drawings: For solid plastic lockers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Show locker trim and accessories.

3. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard size:

1. Lockers and hardware.











A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching

mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Full-size units of the following locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount

installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:

a. Locks.

b. Identification plates.

c. Hooks.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products

specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar

service conditions for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: A Company or Individual, regularly engaged in installation of

products specified in this Section, with a minimum of 5 years experience.


A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their

installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements

before fabrication.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of solid plastic bases for lockers.






B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other

related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that solid plastic lockers can be

supported and installed as indicated.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of solid plastic

lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty

period.


a. Structural failures.

b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

3. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Lockers: 25 years from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain solid plastic lockers and accessories from single source from

single locker manufacturer.


A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable

provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-

ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Solid Plastic:

1. Shall be made from high impact, high density polyethylene (HDPE) formed under

high pressure into solid plastic sheet material and components with homogeneous

color throughout. All HDPE components shall have slight “orange peel” finish.

2. Material Testing-All solid plastic components shall resist deterioration and

discoloration when subjected to any of the following: acetic acid 80%, acetone,

ammonia 12%, ammonium phosphate, bleach 12%, borax, brine, caustic soda,

chlorine water, citric acid, copper chloride, core oils, hydrochloric acid 40%,






potassium bromide soaps, sodium bicarbonate, trisodium phosphate, urea, urine and

vinegar. (Testing in accordance with corrosion testing procedure established by the

United States Plastic Corporation)

2.4 KNOCKED-DOWN CORRIDOR LOCKERS LK1



following:

1. Bradley Corporation.

2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

3. Scranton Products.

B. Doors: Fabricated from 0.50 inch thickness solid plastic (HDPE) sheet; doors shall be fully

vented, full height of door.

C. Body: Fabricate from 3/8' solid plastic sheet for sides, tops, bottoms, backs and shelves.

Components shall have machined edges to accept assembly brackets and be prepped for

dovetail connection.

D. Base: Fabricate base from 1-inch thick solid plastic (HDPE). Assemble on-site and adjust

to field conditions.

E. Frames: Fabricated from 1/2-inch thick solid plastic (HDPE) sheet.

F. Hinges: Heavy duty continuous hinge, full height of door, extruded aluminum with

corrosion free stainless steel pin.

G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so

locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.

1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with padlocks; positive

automatic latching.

a. Continuous spring loaded latch shall be made from high impact HPDE plastic

and securely fastened to the entire length of door.

H. Locks: Combination or key padlocks provided by user.

I. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum

plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.

J. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ABS black plastic double prong coat hook.

K. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 3/8 inch thick solid plastic (HDPE) sheet.










1. Closures: Vertical-end type.

2. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.

L. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 1/2 inch thick solid plastic sheet.

M. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 1/2 inch thick solid plastic sheet.

N. Base Trim: Fabricated from 1/2 inch thick solid plastic sheet.

O. Finish: Solid color throughout solid plastic sheet material with “smooth orange peel”

texture.

1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with faces flat and free of dents or

distortion. Make exposed edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless


2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete

installation.

B. Fabricate each locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back;

and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members

of each locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:

1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.

2. Coat Hooks: For each compartment of each locker.

D. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for

nominal assembly at Project site.

E. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths

as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of lockers; finished to match lockers.

F. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible

fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.

1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.

G. Base Trim: Fabricated with minimum 4-inch face width and in lengths as long as practical;

material to match lockers.






H. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; material to match lockers. Provide

slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.

I. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for

perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers; material to match lockers.

1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.

J. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; material to match

lockers.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads.

B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.

1. Provide nonferrous-or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of

exterior walls for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with


Work.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance

of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not

more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup

reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent material distortion.

2. Anchor single rows of lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers and of lockers

to base.






B. Knocked-Down Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on

door faces or face frames.

C. Equipment:

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.

3. Identification Plates: Identify lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two

aluminum rivets.

D. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight,

hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach recess trim to recessed lockers with concealed clips.

2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on

Drawings.

3. Attach sloping-top units to lockers, with closures at exposed ends.

4. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends

of nonrecessed lockers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without

binding.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during

construction.

B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished

appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker

manufacturer.






CANOPIES 107400 - 1

SECTION 107400 – CANOPIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes building supported, pre-engineered and prefinished metal canopies

including fascia, channels, decking, tension rods, drainage system and attachment hardware.

B. References:

1. Aluminum Association (AA) DAF 45 – Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

2. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA).

3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)-7-Minimum Design Loads for

Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings, layout of overhead supported canopy system,

bent locations (identify wet bents), all mechanical joint locations with complete details,

connections, jointing and accessories. Include details of anchorage.

B. Samples:

1. 3" x 3" inch coating samples in specified color.

2. 6" long fascia extrusion showing profile and standard finish.

3. 6" decking samples showing profile and standard finish.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, component performance

data and installation instructions.

D. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for IgCC Section 503.2: For products having recycled content,


recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled

content.





CANOPIES 107400 - 2


A. Manufacturer: Obtain aluminum overhead supported canopy systems from only one (1)

manufacturer.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and

fabrication where possible, to insure proper fitting of work. However, allow for

adjustments within specified tolerations wherever taking of field measurements before

fabrication might delay work.

C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

coordinated installation.

D. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections which interface

with overhead supported canopy system (building anchorage, etc.).


A. System Performance: Provide aluminum overhead supported canopy system to withstand

standard wind pressure, snow load and drifting snow load in accordance with Virginia

Uniform Statewide Building Code.

B. Sizes shown on drawings are to be considered minimum.

C. Structure shall be capable of sustaining severe icing, hail, hurricane force winds and

supporting a concentrated load such as being walked upon.


A. Deliver, store and handle covered walkway system components as recommended by

manufacturer. Handle and store in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid

excessive stresses.

1.7 Warranty

A. Manufacturer’s Standard Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant the entire system against

defects in labor and materials for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of

substantial completion as established in Division One of these specifications. Defects in

labor and material may include but is not limited to, one or more of the following:

1. Metal failure including excessive deflection.





CANOPIES 107400 - 3

2. Fastener failure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM CANOPY

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MASA

Architectural Canopies, Extrudeck Series System or comparable product to include other

products that has similar profile with the following:

1. Rusco Canopies- Extruded Aluminum.

2. Floline Systems Canopy

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusion: ASTM B221 &ASTM B429 6063-T5 alloy and temper.

B. Standard finish for all components shall be manufacturer’s standard Kynar 500 finish

complying with written instructions for surface preparations including pretreatment,

application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Framing:

1. Type: Extruded Aluminum

2. Size; 8” x .125”

B. Canopy Supports: Extruded Aluminum Canopy Support “I” Beam.

C. Decking:

1. Profile: As indicated on drawings.

2. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard metal decking thickness. Finish to match canopy.

D. Attachments: 1.050 inch diameter manufacturer’s standard tier rod. Finish to match canopy.

E. Fascia Profile: Industrial Type C-Channel; 8" overall or as indicated on drawings.

F. Drainage System: Provide continuous aluminum gutter, downspouts and straps as indicated

on drawings. Finish to match canopy.





CANOPIES 107400 - 4

G. Hardware: All fasteners shall be manufacturer’s standard stainless steel for corrosion

resistance.

H. Other Components: Provide other components as indicated or ads required for system

attachment, drainage and performance.

2.4 FINISH

A. Aluminum:

1. Pre-treatment: Pre-treat to ASTM D1730, type as recommended by canopy

manufacturer or approved by powder coating manufacturer.

2. Finish Coat: Manufacturer’s standard thermosetting polyester resin-based powder.

Kynar.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color to match adjacent

wall panels.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Comply with indicated profiles, dimensioned requirements and structural requirements.

B. Use sections true to details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth

surfaces of uniform color and texture, free from defects impairing strength and durability.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine adjacent work for conditions that would prevent quality installation of system.

B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.2 FIELD DIMENSIONS

A. General contractor shall field confirm bent locations, dimensions and elevations shown on

shop drawings prior to fabrication.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Erection: Set roof support frames into anchors provided in the exterior wall; set to required

elevations, align, plumb and level. Follow manufacturer's instructions.

B. Assemble all components in a neat, workmanlike manner.





CANOPIES 107400 - 5


A. Damaged Units: Replace roof deck panels and other components of the work which have

been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful minor repair.

B. Cleaning: Remove protective coverings at time in project construction sequence which will

afford greatest protection of work. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by

manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

C. Protection: Advise Contractor of protection and surveillance procedures, as required to

ensure that work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at time of







CANOPIES 107400 - 6






LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313 - 1

SECTION 111313 - LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes loading dock bumpers.


A. Product Data: For each type of loading dock bumper.

B. Shop Drawings: For dock bumpers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOCK BUMPERS

A. General: Surface-mounted bumpers; of type, size, and construction indicated; designed to

absorb kinetic energy and minimize damage to loading dock structure.

B. Laminated-Tread Dock Bumper: Fabricated from multiple, uniformly thick plies cut from

fabric-reinforced rubber tires. Laminate plies under pressure on not less than two 3/4-inch-

diameter, steel supporting rods that are welded at one end to 1/4-inch-thick, structural-steel

end angle and secured with a nut and angle at the other end. Fabricate angles with predrilled

anchor holes and sized to provide not less than 1 inch of tread plies extending beyond the

face of closure angles.

1. Thickness: 6 inches.

2. Horizontal Style: 6 inches high by 16 inches wide.

C. Anchorage Devices: Galvanized-steel anchor bolts, nuts, washers, bolts, sleeves, cast-in-

place plates, and other anchorage devices as required to fasten bumpers securely in place

and to suit installation type indicated. Hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.





LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313 - 2

D. Materials: ASTM 36/A 36M for steel plates, shapes, and bars. Hot-dip galvanize according

to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that complies

with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of

platform and anchorage.

1. Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers to preset anchor bolts embedded in

concrete or to cast-in-place inserts or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates

or angles. If preset anchor bolts, cast-in-place inserts, or threaded studs welded to

embedded-steel plates or angles are not provided, attach dock bumpers by drilling

and anchoring with expansion anchors and bolts.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished dock bumpers, inspect exposed

finishes and repair damaged finishes.






PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 1

SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrically operated, front-projection screens and controls.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front-projection

screens.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a

magnesium carbonate surface as determined per SMPTE RP 94.

B. Half-Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen surface to the most

central position on a perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the screen

where the gain is half of the peak gain.



B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:

1. Drop lengths.

2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces.

3. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case.

4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units.

5. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes.

6. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units.

7. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units.

8. Accessories.






C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes of surface-mounted screen cases.


A. Maintenance Data: For front-projection screens to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front-projection screens until spaces

are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at

occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of front-projection screens with adjacent construction,

including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression

system, and partitions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front-projection screens from single

manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen

manufacturer.

2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting

accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Provide units that

are listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Controls: Remote, key-operated, three-position control switch installed in recessed

device box with flush cover plate matching other electrical device cover plates in

room where switch is installed.

a. Provide one control switches for each screen.

b. Provide power supply for low-voltage systems if required.






c. Provide key-operated, power-supply switch.

d. Provide infrared or radio-frequency remote control consisting of battery-

powered transmitter and receiver.

e. Provide video interface control for connecting to projector. Projector provides

signal to raise or lower screen.

3. End-Mounted Motor: Instant-reversing, gear-drive motor of size and capacity

recommended by screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings,

automatic thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop

screen in up and down positions, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. Locate

motor in its own compartment on left end of screen unless otherwise indicated.

4. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom edge

formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod with ends of rod

protected by plastic caps.

a. Roller for end-mounted motor is supported by self-aligning bearings in

brackets.

5. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as braided

polyester, on each side of screen that is connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull

screen flat horizontally.

B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure, with Motor-in-

Roller, and without Tab Tensioning: Units designed and fabricated for suspended mounting;

with bottom of case composed of two panels, fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring; one

panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and

fully raised, the other removable or openable for access to interior of case.


incorporated into the work include, but are not limited, to the following:

a. Da-Lite Screen Company.

b. Draper, Inc.

c. Stewart Filmscreen Company.

2. Provide metal or metal-lined wiring compartment.

3. Screen Case: Made from metal.

4. Provide screen case with trim flange to receive ceiling finish.

5. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Baked enamel.

2.3 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL

A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 0.8

at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface. Green Guard Gold Certified.

B. Material: Vinyl sheet.






C. Mildew-Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested according to ASTM G 21.

D. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701.

E. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

F. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams.

G. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.

H. Size of Viewing Surface: 16:9; 52 inches by 92 inches.

I. Provide extra drop length at top of screen so that bottom of screen is 33 inches above floor.

1. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's


B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining

construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a

smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen

is lowered.

1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with


a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces

and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used.

Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum

ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures,

and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.

3. Test manually operated units to verify that screen-operating components are in

optimum functioning condition.






ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. Including mounting and

operating hardware.

2. Manually operated horizontal mini-blinds. Including mounting and operating

hardware.


1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting

roller shades and accessories.




components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller

shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including

shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material to

indicate interior faces.

2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long

for each type of roller shade indicated.

3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.

D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.








B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size,

color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. NFPA Flame-Test: Passes NFPA 701. Materials tested shall be identical to products

proposed for use.

C. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and

location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and

location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in

spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended

use.






B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable

glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that

vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid

delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Draper

Inc. clutch operated Flex shade or comparable product by one of the following:

a. BTX Window Automation, Inc.

b. CACO, Inc. Window Fashions.

c. DFB Sales, Inc.

d. Draper Inc., Basis-of-Design Product.

e. Insolroll Window Shading Systems.

f. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

g. MechoShade Systems, Inc.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS, RS-1

1. Manually operated window shades with independent control: manually operated.

Vertical roll-up, fabric window shade with components necessary for complete

installation.

2. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and

clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted

and lubricated.

a. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

1) Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.

2) Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.

b. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller

shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.

1) Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as

recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.






3. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall

thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths

of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated

drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of

shadebands for service.

a. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade.

b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.

c. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

4. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with

roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting

location and conditions indicated.

5. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller

drive-end assembly.

6. Shadebands:

a. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.

b. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

1) Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.

2) Color and Finish: As indicated on drawings.

7. Installation Accessories:

a. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller

and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed

fasteners.

1) Shape: L-shaped.

2) Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and

shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4

inches.

b. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front

fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.

c. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and

shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

d. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.






e. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for

installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-

in attachment to wall clip without fasteners.

1) Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches.

C. SHADEBAND MATERIALS, RS-1

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Draper

Inc. Phifer Sheerweave PW3500 (4000) 5% openness, or comparable product by one

of the following:

a. BTX Window Automation, Inc.

b. CACO, Inc. Window Fashions.

c. DFB Sales, Inc.

d. Draper Inc., Basis-of-Design Product.

e. Insolroll Window Shading Systems.

f. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

g. MechoShade Systems, Inc.

2. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable

testing agency.

3. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

a. Source: Roller shade manufacturer.

b. Type: Vinyl-coated polyester yarns.

c. Weave: Basketweave.

d. Thickness: .036 in.

e. Weight: 19.2 oz/yd2.

f. Roll Width: 63”, 84”, 98” and 126”.

g. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.

h. Openness Factor: 5 percent.

i. Color: As indicated on Drawings.

D. ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

1. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1,

including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components;

and warning labels.

2. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,

measured at 74 deg F:

a. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of

opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus






or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening

in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

b. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations

between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other

defined vertical separations between openings.

3. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent

possible, except as follows:

a. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or

greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along

shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full

range of movement without distortion of the material.

2.2 HORIZONTAL 1” MINI BLINDS

A. MANUFACTURER

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CACO,

Inc Signature Series Spectrum Horizontal 1” Mini Blinds or comparable product by

one of the following:

a. CACO, Inc. Window Fashions, Basis-of-Design Product.

b. Hunter Douglas Contract

c. Levolor

d. Springs Window Fashions

2. Slats: Lead Free polymer or Aluminum, 1” wide, manufacturer’s standard thickness

3. Secured with top and bottom rail

4. Manual Tilt and Lift operator

5. Capable of complete view obstruction

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.







3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to


B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding

or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of

Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,

before time of Substantial Completion.






LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.16 - 1

SECTION 123553.16 - LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Steel laboratory casework.

2. Filler and closure panels.

3. Laboratory countertops.

B. Related Requirements

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory

casework.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed

partitions for anchoring laboratory casework.

3. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to

laboratory casework.

4. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets”.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory

casework.



B. Sustainable Design Submittals




material.











C. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, and attachment details.

1. Indicate types and sizes of cabinets.

2. Indicate locations of hardware/ and keying of locks.

3. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory

casework.

4. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other

building components, and other laboratory equipment.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For materials requiring color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of hardware and

countertop material, in manufacturer's standard sizes.



B. Product Test Reports: For countertop surface material, based on evaluation of

comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of

laboratory countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and

physical resistance.


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of

polyethylene film or other suitable material.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is

enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and temporary HVAC

system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels

during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



following:

1. ALC-Collegedale.

2. Case Systems Inc.

3. CIF Laboratory Solutions.

4. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation – Basis-of-Design Product.

5. Sheldon Laboratory Systems.

6. South Texas Woodmill, Inc.

7. Stevens Industries, Inc.

8. Terrill Manufacturing Company.

9. Thermo Fisher Scientific, Inc.

10. TMI Systems Design Corporation.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

C. The selected manufacturer shall warrant that all products be free of defects in material and

workmanship for a period of one year. The period shall start at the date of acceptance or

occupation, whichever comes first. Purchaser shall notify the manufacturer’s representative

immediately of any defective product. The manufacturer shall have a reasonable opportunity

to inspect the goods. The purchaser shall return no product until receipt by purchaser of

written shipping instructions from the manufacturer.

2.2 CABINET MATERIAL

A. Steel: Cabinet bodies, drawer bodies, shelves, drawer heads and door assemblies shall be

fabricated from cold rolled steel. (Note: All Drawer and Door Styles are available)

or

B. Stainless Steel: Cabinet bodies, drawer bodies, shelves, drawer heads and door assemblies

shall be fabricated from stainless steel.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General Requirements

1. It is the intent of this specification to provide a high quality steel cabinet specifically

designed for the laboratory environment.
















B. Steel

1. Cold Rolled Steel

a. Cold rolled sheet steel shall be prime grade 12, 14, 16, 18 and 20 gauge U.S.

Standard; roller leveled, and shall be treated at the mill to be free of scale,

ragged edges, deep scratches or other injurious effects.

or

2. Stainless Steel

a. Stainless Steel shall be Type 304; 12, 14, 16, 18 and 20 gauge U.S. Standard.

Stainless steel shall be supplied with a #4 finish free of burrs, weld marks, or

other imperfections.

C. Composition Core Plywood

1. Composition core plywood shall be 3-ply and shall be compliant with ANSI A208.1-

199, and/or ANSI A208.2-1994

D. Hardware and Trim

1. Drawer and Door Pulls

a. Drawer and door pulls shall be mounted on 4" centers, offering a comfortable

hand grip, and be securely fastened to doors and drawers. They shall be

manufactured from Anodized aluminum in a shallow rounded shape.

2. Hinges:

a. Inset 5-Knuckle Hinges

1) Inset style cabinets shall use 5-Knuckle hinges made of Type 304

stainless steel .089 thick, 2-1/2" high, with brushed satin finish, and shall

be the institutional type with a five- knuckle bullet-type barrel. Hinges

shall be attached to both door and case with two screws through each

leaf. Welding of hinges to door or case will not be accepted. Doors under

36" in height shall be hung on one pair of hinges, and doors over 36" in

height shall be hung on three hinges.

3. Drawer Slide

a. Heavy duty, full extension, soft-close, self-closing, zinc plated, ball bearing

slides, rated for 100 pound loads (See Drawer Assemblies in 2.04, option 1)

4. Locks






a. Disk Tumbler

1) Locks (located on every metal base cabinet) shall be a 5-disc tumbler

with heavy duty interchangeable cylinder. Exposed lock noses shall be

dull nickel (satin) plated and stamped with identifying numbers. Locks

shall have capacity for 2000 primary key changes and Master Keyed one

level with the potential of 5 different, non-interchangeable Master Key

groups.

5. Catches – For steel casework with 5-knuckle hinges

a. Positive Catch

1) A two-piece heavy-duty cam action positive catch Main body of the

catch shall be confined within an integral cabinet top or divider rail,

while latching post shall be mounted on the hinge side of door.

Polyethylene roller type catches are not acceptable.

6. Shelf Adjustment Clips

a. Shelf adjustment clips shall be die formed, nickel-plated steel.

7. Base Molding

a. Base molding shall be provided by others. Resilient base installed on top of

cabinet base as noted on drawings.

2.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Steel Cabinet Construction:

1. General:

a. All cabinet bodies shall be flush front construction with intersection of vertical

and horizontal case members, such as end panels, top rails, bottoms and vertical

posts in same plane without overlap. Exterior corners shall be spot welded with

heavy back up reinforcements.

b. Each cabinet shall be complete so that units can be relocated at any subsequent

time without requiring field application of finished ends or other such parts.

c. All cabinets shall have a cleanable smooth interior. Bottoms shall be formed

down on sides and back to create easily cleanable corners with no burrs or

sharp edges.

d. Cabinets shall be designed using a standardized grid pattern to allow

reconfiguration of doors and drawers.

2. Steel Gauges






a. Gauges of steel used in construction of cases shall be 18 gauge, except as

follows:

1) Leveling bolt reinforcements 12 gauge.

2) Top and intermediate front horizontal rails, apron rails, hinge

reinforcements, and reinforcement gussets, 16 gauge.

3) Drawer assemblies, door assemblies, bottom, bottom back rail, toe space

rail, and adjustable shelves, 20 gauge.

B. Base Cabinets

1. End uprights shall be formed into not less than an L formation at top, bottom, back

and a 3/4" wide front C formation. A pilaster shall be added to the inside front of the

upright for cabinet and hinge reinforcement and shall be perforated for the support of

drawer channels, intermediate rails, hinge screws, and shelf adjustment holes.

2. A 7/8" high top horizontal rail shall interlock with the flange at top of end panels for

strength, but shall be flush at face of unit. Top rails not flush with face of end

uprights are not acceptable.

3. Intermediate rails shall be provided between doors and drawers, but shall not be

provided between drawers unless made necessary by locks in drawers. Intermediate

rails shall be recessed behind doors and drawer fronts, and designed so that security

panels may be added as required.

4. Toe space rail shall extend up and forward to engage bottom panel to form a smooth

surfaced fully enclosed toe space, 3" deep x 4" high.

5. Back construction shall be one piece with integral channel formed for maximum

strength and welded to back of top and bottom flanges of end uprights.

6. Each bottom corner of base cabinets shall have a 3/8"-16 leveling bolt, 2-1/2" long

capable of supporting 500 lbs. Access to the leveling bolts shall be through plug

buttons in the cabinet bottom. Access to leveling bolts through toe space or leveling

bolts requiring special tools to adjust are not acceptable.

7. Steel Door assembly (two-piece) for solid panel swinging doors shall consist of an

inner and outer door pan. Outer door pan shall be formed at all four sides. The corners

on the pull side of the outer door pan shall be welded and ground smooth to prevent

exposure of sharp edges of steel at these critical points. Inner door pan shall be

flanged at all four sides with hinge reinforcements welded in place. The door

assembly shall be 3/4" thick and contains sound deadening material. Door assemblies

shall be painted prior to assembly, and shall be punched for attaching pulls. Inner pan

formation of door shall be indented for in-field installation of locks when required.

8. Doors shall be readily removable and hinges easily replaceable. Hinges shall be

applied to the cabinet and door with screws. Welding of hinges to either cabinet or

door will not be acceptable.

9. Drawer Assemblies

a. Drawer bodies shall be made in one-piece construction including the bottom,

two sides, back and front. They shall be fully coved at interior bottom on all

four sides for easy cleaning. The top front of the inner drawer body shall be

offset to interlock with the channel formation in drawer head providing a 3/4"

thick drawer head.







A. Steel Casework Construction Performance

1. Base cabinets shall be constructed to support at least a uniformly distributed load 200

pounds per square foot of cabinet top area, including working surface without

objectionable distortion of interference with door and drawer operation.

2. Base cabinet leveling bolts shall support 500 pounds per corner, at 1-1/2" projection of

the leveling bolt below the cabinet bottom.

3. Each adjustable and fixed shelf 4 feet or shorter in length shall support an evenly

distributed load of 40 pounds per square foot up to a maximum of 200 pounds, with

nominal temporary deflection, but without permanent set.

4. Full extension soft-close, self-closing ball bearing zinc plated drawer slide shall be

rated for 100 pound loads.

B. Steel Paint System Finish and Performance Specification

1. Steel Paint System Finish

a. After Cold Rolled Steel and Textured Steel component parts have been

completely welded together and before finishing, they shall be given a pre-paint

treatment to provide adhesion of the finish system to the steel and to aid in the

prevention of corrosion. Physical and chemical cleaning of the steel shall be

accomplished by washing with an alkaline cleaner, followed by a spray

treatment with a complex metallic phosphate solution to provide a uniform fine

grained crystalline phosphate surface that shall provide bond for the finish and

enhance the protection provided by the finish against humidity and corrosive

chemicals.

b. After the phosphate treatment, the steel shall be dried and all steel surfaces shall

be coated with a chemical and corrosion-resistant, environmentally friendly,

electrostatically applied powder coat finish. All components shall be

individually painted, insuring that no area be vulnerable to corrosion due to

lack of paint coverage. The coating shall be cured by baking at elevated

temperatures to provide maximum properties of corrosion and wear resistance.

c. The completed finish system in standard colors shall meet the performance test

requirements as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Performance Test Results (Chemical Spot Tests)

a. Testing Procedure

1) Testing recommendations, test conditions, required as recommended by

manufacturer.






2.6 WORKSURFACES

A. Materials

1. Epoxy Resin Tops (Basis of Design Product, Trespa TopLab)

2. Epoxy Resin Tops (Kemresin)

3. Environmentally Friendly Epoxy Resin Tops (EarthResin)

2.7 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS – ERT1

A. Epoxy Resin Top (ERT1): Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth,

nonspecular finish.



to the following:

a. Durcon Incorporated.

b. Prime Industries, Inc.

c. Thermo Fisher Scientific, Inc.

d. Trespa; Basis-of-Design Product (TopLab)

2. Physical Properties

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi.

b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi.

c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.

d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.

e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.

3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested

with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28

percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate,

ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol,

sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.

b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).

4. Color: Black.

5. Warranty: 10-year product guarantee minimum.

B. Epoxy Countertops:

1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service

fittings and accessories, and butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed

metal splines.










a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with beveled or rounded edge and

corners, and with drip groove and integral coved backsplash.

b. Countertop Construction: Epoxy composition not less than 1 inch thick,

laminated to backing, uniform throughout full thickness.

c. Product Option: Phenolic-composite countertops may not be substituted for

epoxy countertops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE EXAMINATION

A. The owner and/or his representative shall assure all building conditions conducive to the

installation of a finished goods product; all critical dimensions and conditions previously

checked have been adhered to by other contractors (general, mechanical, electrical, etc.) to

assure a quality installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation

1. Prior to beginning installation of casework, check and verify that no irregularities

exist that would affect quality of execution of work specified.

B. Coordination

1. Coordinate the work of the Section with the schedule and other requirements of other

work being prepared in the area at the same time both with regard to mechanical and

electrical general construction work.

C. Performance

1. Casework

a. Set casework components plumb, square, and straight with no distortion and

securely anchor to building structure. Shim as required using concealed shims.

b. Bolt continuous cabinets together with joints flush, tight and uniform, and with

alignment of adjacent units within 1/16" tolerance.

c. Secure wall cabinets to solid supporting material, not to plaster, lath or gypsum

board.

d. Abut top edge surfaces in one true plane. Provide flush joints not to exceed

1/8".

2. Worksurfaces

a. Where required due to field conditions, scribe to abutting surfaces.






b. Only factory prepared field joints, located per approved shop drawings, shall be

permitted. Secure the joints in the field, where practical, in the same manner as

in the factory.

c. Secure worksurfaces to casework and equipment components with materials

and procedures recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Adjust and Clean

1. Repair or remove and replace defective work, as directed by owner and/or his

representative upon completion of installation.

2. Adjust doors, drawers and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly.

3. Clean shop finished casework; touch up as required.

4. Clean worksurfaces and leave them free of all grease and streaks.

5. Casework to be left broom clean and orderly.

E. Protection

1. Provide reasonable protective measures to prevent casework and equipment from

being exposed to other construction activity.

2. Advise owner and/or his representative of procedures and precautions for protection

of material, installed laboratory casework and fixtures from damage by work of other

trades.






DISPLAY CASE DOOR 123559- 1

SECTION 123559 – DISPLAY CASE DOOR

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior swinging display case doors for display cases.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for overhead-steel support for all-glass systems.

2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for cylinders and keying system.

3. Section 101200 “Display Cases” for coordination.







2. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For display case doors.

1. Include plans, elevations, and sections.

2. Include details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of rail fittings.

3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish indicated, prepared on Samples of

size indicated below.






1. Metal Finishes: 6-inch-long sections of rail fittings, accessory fittings, and other

items.

2. Glass: 6 inches square laminated glass, showing exposed-edge finish.

3. Door Hardware to be coordinated with Owner’s mortise cylinders and keying system.





A. Maintenance Data: For display case doors, including installation and maintenance

instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Provide display case doors produced by a firm experienced in

manufacturing display case door systems that are similar to those indicated for this project.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of display case door

system that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

b. Failure of operating components.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of all-glass entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due

to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes.


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide 130-CM Series

Display Case Door System with continuous bars, C.R. Laurence Co. Inc. (CRL) Blumcraft

or comparable product.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum, Stainless Steel Clad.

B. Glass: Provide flat, full tempered glass in thickness indicated for doors and sidelites.

1. Tempered glass components that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements

of CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II. ASTM 1048.

a. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm).

b. Edge treatment: Provide bright flat polished edges for all exposed edges of

glass.

c. Specify Glass Type: Clear.

d. All glass fabrication to be completed before tempering.

e. Visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not permitted in tempered

glass.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Rail Configuration: Full width at top and bottom of doors as indicated on drawings.

B. 1-1/4" (31.8 mm) square in aluminum; 1-3/8" (35 mm) square when clad.

C. Continuous mounting bars measuring 2" (50.8 mm) high by 1-1/4" (31.8 mm) wide in

aluminum or 1-3/8" (35 mm) wide with clad, are available in finishes to match the door rails

top and bottom.






D. Center pivots to be AP-150 at top; BP-150 at bottom.

E. Lock accepts a standard mortise key cylinder. Mounts in bottom continuous mounting.

F. Accessory Fittings: Provide manufacturer’s standard accessories of the type indicated.

Comply with requirements indicted for kind and form metal and finish of door fittings.

1. Overhead door stop: Standard Door Stop or Roller Catch/Stop with strike plate in top

rail.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install display case door systems and associated components according to manufacturer's


B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.

C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.

D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Adjust doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points and

weather stripping.

B. Adjust operating hardware to ensure proper operation

C. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces.






METAL COUNTERTOPS 123616 - 1

SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall mounted stainless-steel countertops with steel support.







C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail

fabrication and installation, including field joints.


A. Deliver metal countertops only after casework has been completed in installation areas.

B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during

handling and installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction to receive metal countertops

by field measurements before fabrication.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below

that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral

curing, silicone.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25.

3. Color: Clear.

4. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

5. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California




whichever is less.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOPS

A. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch-thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide smooth, clean

exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of

1 inch over the base cabinets.

1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints.

2. Weld shop-made joints.

3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating.

4. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch-thick edge with a 1/2-inch return flange.

2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish,

with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of

each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use

fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site

processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on

Shop Drawings.

C. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners

at each front, end, and back.

D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent

deflection.

E. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another

permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements

in partitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less than 24 inches o.c.


A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.

B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled

areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over the

countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c.

Remove protection at Substantial Completion.






END OF VOLUME 1 SPECS

Renovate Engineering and Industrial Technology Building ......danville community college renovate...

Documents

Transcript of Renovate Engineering and Industrial Technology Building ......danville community college renovate...